Audioaccess W.H.E.N. AVR21EN Installation Instructions Manual

Download

The Whole-House Entertainment Network

W.H.E.N.

™

Installation Instructions

Surr.

Surr. Select Tuning AM/FM

Mode

Set

Preset

Optimizer MIC In Out In/out

Source

Optical 3 Coaxial 3

Tun

Mode

Y Pb Pr S-Video Video

Game/Cam

L-Audio-R

READ FIRST! Important Safety Precautions! 4 INTRODUCTION 5 KEY FEATURES 6

Main Room 6 Remote Rooms 6

TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS 6 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION 7 WHAT’S INCLUDED 8

AVR21EN Carton Contents 8 AVH21 Carton Contents 8 WPS21 Carton Contents 8 KP21 Carton Contents 8 KP21R Carton Contents 8

SYSTEM PLANNING 9

Main Room 9 Remote Rooms 10

PRE-WIRE 10

Main Room 10 Remote Rooms 11

AVH21 11 WPS21 11 KP2117

AVR21EN FRONT-PANEL FEATURES 12 AVR21EN FRONT-PANEL INFORMATION DISPLAY FEATURES 15 AVR21EN REAR-PANEL FEATURES 16 MULTIROOM COMPONENTS 20

AVH21 FRONT-PANEL FEATURES 20 AVH21 REAR-PANEL FEATURES 20 AVH21 TOP FEATURES 22 AVH21 STATUS-PANEL FEATURES 22 WPS21 FRONT-PANEL FEATURES 24 WPS21 TOP-PANEL FEATURES 24 WPS21 STATUS-PANEL FEATURES 24 KP21 FRONT-PANEL FEATURES 26 KP21 REAR-PANEL FEATURES 28

SPF FEATURES (SOURCE POWER FLAG) 29 MAIN ROOM INSTALLATION & SETUP 32

Installing AVR21EN and Source Components 32

AVR21EN CONNECTIONS 33

Source Connections 33 ANTENNAS 36 MONITOR OUTPUTS (MAIN ROOM VIDEO DISPLAY) 36 Composite/S-Video 36 Component Video 36 HDMI 36 SPEAKER CONNECTIONS 37 Subwoofer 38 Pre-Out 38 Control Out (Source IR) 38 Remote 38 Multiroom Link 38

MULTIROOM INSTALLATION & SETUP 39

Installing W.H.E.N. System Components 39 KP21 Hardware 39 Keypad Address (Zone Number) 39 Three-Zone System 40 Hub System 40

THREE ZONE SYSTEM 41

Main Room 41 Remote Rooms 41

Keypads 41 Speakers 41

HUB SYSTEM 42

Main Room 42 Hub Installation 42 AVH21 CONFIGURATION 44 AVH21 Hub Configuration Switch 44 HEAD END CONNECTIONS 44

AVH21 Connections 44

Power In 44 Uplink/Multiroom Link 45 Keypad Connections 45 Source Video In 46 Camera Video In 46 Zone (KP) Video Out 46 Door 1 48 Door 2 48

WPS21 CONNECTIONS 48

AVH21 Power Connections 48 AC Input 48

ZONE CONNECTIONS 48

KP21 Connections 48

Control, Digital Audio, Data (Three-Zone System) 48 Control, Digital Audio, Data (Hub System) 48 AUX In (Local Source In) 49 PREOUT (Keypad to Local High Power Amplifier 49

or Powered Subwoofer) Speakers 50 TV/Video Display 50 Connecting an External IR Sensor 50 Keypad Address (Zone Number) 39

SYSTEM SETUP 51

Theater Setup 51 Speaker Selection and Placement 51 Speaker Placement 51 System Setup 51 Using the On-Screen Display 52 Making Configuration Adjustments 52 Setting the System Configuration Memory 53 Input Setup 53

CLOCK SETUP 53 MAIN ROOM SETUP 53 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 54 SOURCES 54

Source Name 54 Source Audio Input 54 Audio Mode 54

DOLBY 55 DTS 55 Logic 7 56 DSP 56 Stereo 56

Video Input 56 Video Settings 57

FRONT-PANEL CONNECTIONS AVR21EN 77 EzSet/EQ 58 SPEAKER SETUP 61

EzSet Activate 61 Speaker Configuration and Bass Management 61 Speaker Crossovers 63 Speaker Distances (Delay) 63 Speaker Levels 64

LIP SYNC 64 REC OUT 64 VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS 65

HDMI Enhancement 66

Table of Contents

ADVANCED SETTINGS 66

Front-Panel Timeout 66 Front-Panel Brightness 66 Power-On Volume 66 On Screen Status 67 Main Menu Time-Out 67

REMOTE CONTROL SETUP 67

Carrier 68 PROGRAM CODE 68 LEARN CODE 69 ON-OFF COMMAND (SPF) 69 HOME THEATER MASTER CONTROL 70

TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF 70 SCREEN CONTROL 72 LIGHTING CONTROL 73 CURTAIN CONTROL 75

ZONE SETUP 79

Assign Services 79 Assign Entertainment Services 80 Name Paging Groups 80 Name Entertainment Groups 81 Name Sleep Groups 81 Camera Setup 81 Name Wake-Up Groups 82 Name Doors 82 Keypad Setup by Number 83

Name 84 Setup Access 84 Paging Group 84 Entertainment Group 84 Priority 84 Permission 85 Page Room 85 Monitor This Zone 85 Camera Assigned 86 Door Answer 86 Door Open 86 Wake-Up Group 87

Sleep Group 88 Keypad Setup by Name 90 Diagnostics 90

Settings 91

Run System Test 91

Restart Network 92

PROGRAMMING THE AVR21ENR1 REMOTE CONTROL 93 AVR21ENR1 REMOTE FEATURES 94

TV Setup 93 Manual Program 94 Automatic Code Entry 94 Learning Commands 95

Learn Device 95

Learn Button 95 Home Theater Master 97 Macro Programming 97 Resetting the Remote 99

AVR21ENR1 FUNCTION LIST 106 KP21R REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 111 PROGRAMMING THE KP21R REMOTE CONTROL 114

TV Setup 114 Manual Program 115 Automatic Code Entry 116 Learning Commands 117

Learn Device 117

Learn Button 117 Macro Programming 118 Erasing a Macro 119 Read a Macro 120 Resetting the Remote 120

KP21R ZONE REMOTE FUNCTION LIST 122

MAIN ROOM OPERATION 126

Basic Operation 126

Turning the AVR21EN On or Off 126 Main Room Sleep Mode 126 Source Selection 126 6-Channel/8-Channel Direct Input 127

Volume and Tone Control 127 Video Processing 127 Surround Mode Selection 127 Digital Audio Playback 127 SURROUND MODE CHART 128 Selecting a Digital Source 129 Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode Indications 129 PCM Playback 130 HDCD Playback 130 Speaker/Channel Indicators 131 Night Mode 132 MP3 Audio Playback 132 IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL PLAYBACK: 133 Tuner Operation 133

Station Selection 133

Preset Memory Storage 133

Recalling Preset Stations 133 Recording 133

MULTIROOM SYSTEM OPERATION 134

POWER ON 134 POWER OFF 134 VOLUME CONTROL 134 SOURCE SELECTION (ENTERTAINMENT) 134 SOURCE CONTROL 134 PARTY MODE 136 PAGING 137 MONITOR 137 WAKE-UP 137 SLEEP 137 DOOR 138

MAIN ROOM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 139

Processor Reset 139

APPENDIX 141

SYSTEM DEFAULTS 141 PERSONAL SETTINGS WORKSHEETS 142

MULTIROOM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 140 SYSTEMS SPECIFICATIONS 149

This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. For models having a power cord with a polarized plug: CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide

slot, fully inserted.

For Canadian Model

Cet apparell numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisee: ATTENTION: Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus

large de la fiche dans la bome correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Modèle pour les Canadian

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet apparell numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

READ FIRST! Important Safety Precautions!

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with a dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources

such as radiators, heat registers, stoves or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of

the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being

walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories

specified by the manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,

bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning

storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service

personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, or the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally or has been dropped.

15. Do not expose this apparatus to drip-

ping or splashing and ensure that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, are placed on the apparatus.

16. To completely disconnect this appara-

tus from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from the AC receptacle.

17. The mains plug of the power supply

cord shall remain readily operable.

18. Do not expose batteries to excessive

heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

Part No. HCGULCSA60065_7ed 11/2006V EN

Thank you for purchasing the Audioaccess®W.H.E.N.

™

Whole-House Entertainment Network. This system utilizes the vast technological resources of the Harman International companies to create a whole new approach to multiroom audio/video entertainment.

With most whole-house systems, home theater is a secondary aspect of system design and application. Typically, whole-house source components can be shared with the home theater, but properly distributing A/V signals and managing source power can become burdensome in system design and installation. W.H.E.N. resolves these issues by making the home theater the main room, and component, of the system. The AVR21EN high-performance audio/video multichannel processor/amplifier and multiroom system controller is the central component for both the home theater and multiroom systems. All sources shared by the home theater and whole-house systems connect directly to the AVR21EN. Source control and power management are configured and managed centrally with the AVR21EN.

The AVR21EN features the latest technologies for home theater signal processing. All levels of audio and video signals from line-level audio, with composite or “S” video to digital audio and component video routing, in addition to an HDMI

™

output, provide seamless switching from any A/V source to numerous options of speaker configurations and video displays. Additionally, there are endless options for audio signal processing modes, including: Dolby

Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic®2,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Headphone, DTS,

DTS Neo:6,

Logic 7®and more. A DCDi®by Faroudja video up-converter scales all inputs to 1080i via HDMI or component video outputs. The AVR21EN also incorporates EzSet/EQ

™

home theater calibration that automatically sets system audio output parameters, based upon speaker configuration and room characteristics, creating the ultimate home theater experience.

The home theater is controlled with the full-featured AVR21ENR1 main room hand-held remote control, which provides complete control of the home theater and also interfacing with W.H.E.N. paging and door-lock systems.

The whole-house components include the AVH21 audio/video distribution hub, KP21 in-wall keypad/audio amplifier and KP21R remote-zone handheld remote control.

AVH21 A/V distribution hubs provide a scalable option for distributing whole-house A/V and control signals. Digital audio and control signals are linked to the AVH21 via an IEEE1394 network connection over Cat. 5e cable. Composite video signals are fed directly to the AVH21’s via RG6 coaxial cable. Each hub can distribute the six whole-house A/V sources from the AVR21EN to up to seven remote rooms or “zones.” Additionally, up to seven video cameras can be connected for security surveillance or incorporated with the KP21 Keypad microphones for whole-house A/V paging and monitoring.

KP21 keypads provide simple, intuitive control of remote zone functions including: zone power, source selection, source control, monitoring, paging and timers. The wall-mount keypads fit most standard two-gang new construction and retrofit J-boxes. The 2-1/2" LCD and 14-function keys provide menu-driven control and setup functions for simple source, zone and system operation.

Each KP21 also features an onboard ultraefficient 50-watts per-channel stereo digital audio amplifier. Placing the amplifier in the local room creates crisp, clear and powerful audio reproduction by reducing the distance between the amplifier and the local speakers. Each keypad has a local, variable linelevel output, allowing incorporation of local high-power amplifiers or powered subwoofers. Line-level audio from a local source can be run through the keypad amplifier and zone speakers using the keypad’s stereo line-level input. Each keypad features a built-in microphone for whole-house paging and an IR sensor, allowing control from the KP21R handheld zone remote control or other properly configured programmable remote. An external IR sensor can be added to provide additional control flexibility.

The KP21R handheld zone remote control provides easy control of zone functions, common and local source control and paging and door lock control.

Introduction

I KP21 keypads feature built-in 50W-per-channel stereo digital

audio amplifiers for maximum efficiency and performance

I Keypad/zone local source line-level audio input for adding a

zone-specific component such as a dedicated cable box, satellite receiver, DVD/CD player, video game, etc.

I Keypad/zone line-level audio output for use with a dedicated

zone high-power audio amplifier or powered subwoofer

I Whole-house paging/video monitoring

I Configurable page groups

I Remote Door-entry control

I Programmable sleep and wake-up timers for each zone,

zone groups or the whole house

I Configurable entertainment groups

Typographic Conventions

In order to help you use this manual with the remote control, front-panel controls and rear-panel connections, certain conventions have been used.

EXAMPLE – indicates a specific remote control or front-panel

button, or rear-panel connection jack

EXAMPLE – indicates a message that is visible in the on-screen display (OSD)

EXAMPLE – indicates a message that is visible on the

AVR front-panel information display

EXAMPLE – indicates a message that is displayed on a remote control LCD screen

EXAMPLE – indicates a message that is displayed on a keypad LCD screen

1 – (number in a square) indicates an AVR21EN front-panel

control or connection

 – (number in a circle) indicates an AVR21EN rear-panel

connection

0 – (number in an oval) indicates a button on the main room

remote (AVR21ENR1)

– (number in a triangle) indicates a button on the zone

remote (KP21R)

– (number in a pentagon) indicates a connection or feature

on the AVH21 audio/video hub

– (number in a rectangle) indicates a connection or feature

on the WPS21 power supply hub

– (number in a hexagon) indicates a connection or feature

on the KP21 keypad

– (number in a star) indicates a connection or feature on

the SPF (Source Power Flag) module

Main Room

I 70 Watts x 7-channel surround mode

I Dual AM/FM tuners

I Three dedicated RS-232 Sony

ES DVD changer interface ports

I DCDi

by Faroudja video up-converter scales all inputs to

1080i via HDMI

™

and component video outputs

I Video parameters are adjustable separately for each video input

I Surround modes include: Dolby

Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic®2,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Headphone, DTS,

DTS Neo:6,®Logic 7

I HDCD®decoding for enhanced CD playback, and MP3 decoding

for use with compatible computers

I High-bandwidth, HDTV-compatible component video inputs for

all six external common A/V sources

I A / V sync delay, adjustable for each input, delivers perfect lip

sync with digital programs or video displays

I Configurable HDMI output

I Front-panel analog audio/video jacks may be used as inputs

or outputs for connection to portable products or video game consoles

I Dedicated front-panel optical digital audio input and output

I Switchable coaxial digital audio input/output

I Switchable component, S-, composite video and stereo line-level

audio input/output

I Six 12V “SPF” (Source Power Flag) inputs provide configurable

source power management to keep sources in sync with main room and whole-house functions

I Two assignable rear panel coaxial and optical digital inputs

I One each rear-panel coaxial and optical digital outputs

I Eight channel DVD audio input

I Eight channel pre-out

I Line-level audio, composite, S- and component video

connections for each of the six source inputs

I Two RJ45 multiroom link terminals for connection to W.H.E.N.

hubs and keypads

I One switched and one unswitched AC outlet

Remote Rooms

I Utilizes AVR21EN processor/controller for multiroom source

control and power management.

I Scalable design allows system configuration from one to

twenty Zones

I Keypad control centrally configured with easy on-screen

menu setup

I Keypad LCD and hard buttons provide menu-driven setup

and control

I KP21 keypads provide control of system, source, paging,

timer and door-entry functions

Key Features

Verify Line Voltage Before Use

Your AVR21EN has been designed for use with 120-volt AC current. Connection to a line voltage other than that for which it is intended can create a safety and fire hazard, and may damage the unit. If you have any questions about the voltage requirements for your specific model, or about the line voltage in your area, contact your selling dealer before plugging the unit into a wall outlet.

Do Not Use Extension Cords

To avoid safety hazards, use only the power cord attached to your unit. We do not recommend that extension cords be used with this product. As with all electrical devices, do not run power cords under rugs or carpets, or place heavy objects on them. Damaged power cords should be replaced immediately by an authorized service center with a cord meeting factory specifications.

Handle the AC Power Cord Gently

When disconnecting the power cord from an AC outlet, always pull the plug; never pull the cord. If you intend to refrain from using the unit for any considerable length of time, disconnect the plug from the AC outlet.

Do Not Open the Cabinet

There are no user-serviceable components inside this product. Opening the cabinet may present a shock hazard, and any modification to the product will void your warranty. If water or any metal object such as a paper clip, wire or a staple accidentally falls inside the unit, disconnect it from the AC power source immediately, and consult an authorized service center.

CATV or Antenna Grounding

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to this product, be certain that it is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes and requirements of the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV System Installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV (cable TV) system installer’s attention to article 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as possible.

Installation Location

I To ensure proper operation and to avoid any potential safety

hazards, place the unit on a firm and level surface. When placing the unit on a shelf, be certain that the shelf and any mounting hardware can support the weight of the product.

I Make certain that proper space is provided both above

and below the unit for ventilation. If this product will be installed in a cabinet or other enclosed area, make certain that there is sufficient air movement within the cabinet. Under some circumstances, a fan may be required.

I Do not place the unit directly on a carpeted surface.

I Avoid installation in extremely hot or cold locations, or in an

area that is exposed to direct sunlight or heating equipment.

I Avoid moist or humid locations.

I Do not obstruct the ventilation slots on the top of the unit, or

place objects directly over them.

I There is the remote possibility that the rubber padding on the

bottom of the unit’s feet may leave marks on certain wood or veneer materials. Use caution when placing the unit on soft woods or other materials that may be damaged by heat or heavy objects.

Cleaning

When the unit gets dirty, wipe it with a clean, soft, dry cloth. NEVER use benzene, aerosol cleaners, thinner, alcohol or any other volatile cleaning agent. Do not use abrasive cleaners, as they may damage the finish of metal parts. Avoid spraying insecticide near the unit.

Moving the Unit

Before moving the unit, be certain to disconnect any interconnection cords with other components, and make certain that you disconnect the unit from the AC outlet.

Important Information for the User

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class-B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However, there is no guarantee that harmful interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

I Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

I Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

I Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

I Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications may cause this unit to fail to com-

ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Installing the WPS21:

I The WPS21 should be installed by a qualified professional.

I For proper ventilation, adequate space around the WPS21

must be allowed: 65mm in front of and behind the unit; 35mm above; and 25mm on both the left and right sides (between the unit’s foot and the panel box).

Important Safety Information

AVR21EN Carton Contents:

1 – AVR21EN processor/controller

1 – AVR21ENR1 remote control

1 – Calibration microphone

4 – AAA batteries

2 – AM loop antennas

2 – FM antennas

1 – IEC standard two-prong power cord

1 – W.H.E.N. installation instructions

1 – Warranty card

AVH21 Carton Contents:

1 – AVH21 W.H.E.N. audio/video distribution hub

3 – AVH21 hub status-panel labels

1 – Four-pin plug-in connector

4 – Two--pin plug-in connectors

8 – Locking pins for installation in Channel Vision C-0128E and

Leviton 47605-28W structured wiring cabinets

1 – Warranty card

WPS21 Carton Contents:

1 – WPS21 W.H.E.N. power hub

1 – IEC standard two-prong power cord

3 – WPS hub status-panel labels

8 – Locking pins for installation in Channel Vision C-0128E and

Leviton 47605-28W structured wiring cabinets

8 – Four-pin plug-in connectors

1 – Warranty card

KP21 Carton Contents:

1 – KP21 W.H.E.N. keypad

1 – KP21 White keypad bezel

1 – KP21/IR pigtail connector

4 – Keypad to backbox screws

4 – Washers

1 – Backbox compatibility card

1 – KP21 user reference card

11 – Warranty card

KP21R Carton Contents:

1 – KP21R zone remote

4 – AAA batteries

1 – KP21R owner’s manual

Unpacking

The carton and shipping materials used to protect your new receiver during shipment were specially designed to cushion it from shock and vibration. We suggest that you save the carton and packing materials for use in shipping if you move, or should the unit ever need repair.

To minimize the size of the carton in storage, you may wish to flatten it. This is done by carefully slitting the tape seams on the bottom and collapsing the carton. Other cardboard inserts may be stored in the same manner. Packing materials that cannot be collapsed should be saved along with the carton in a plastic bag.

If you do not wish to save the packaging materials, please note that the carton and other sections of the shipping protection are recyclable. Please respect the environment and discard those materials at a local recycling center.

At this time, you should remove the protective plastic film from the front-panel lens. Leaving the film in place will affect the performance of your remote control.

What’s Included

The Audioaccess W.H.E.N. system is made up of three main system components (the AVR21EN processor/controller, AVH21 A/V hub and WPS21 power hub) and three user interfaces (the AVR21ENR1 main room remote, KP21 keypad and KP21R remote room remote). When designing a whole-house system, careful planning must be done to ensure that the system has been designed properly, gets installed and configured properly, and – most important – works the way the homeowner wants the system to work.

There are two main sections to be considered when designing and installing a W.H.E.N. system: the home theater, or “main room,” and the remote rooms, which will be referred to here as “zones.”

Main Room

The Main Room component in a W.H.E.N. system is the AVR21EN processor/controller. At its core, it is a highly evolved audio/video surround receiver. All source components that will be played in the main and remote rooms will be located near and connected to the AVR21EN. The home theater speakers also connect directly to the AVR21EN.

Typically, the AVR21EN and source components would be installed in the Main Room in a wall unit, an equipment rack or possibly in an equipment closet. Wherever they get installed, always leave adequate space between components for free airflow to keep components from overheating. Use cooling fans when necessary, if the components are confined to a tight enclosed area. Always leave extra space for wiring, and (whenever possible) when working with a homeowner on new construction, work with the architect to provide space for the W.H.E.N. system components with rear access to system connections, for installation and service when necessary. If rear access is not possible, a pullout equipment rack is recommended to provide easy access to system connections. (If rackmounting, an optional rack-shelf is available from Middle Atlantic Products for the AVR21EN.)

Always position components such as DVD/CD players, VCRs, iPod interfaces, etc., to provide access to the user for loading discs or tapes, or connecting an iPod or other portable media player.

In some cases, the home theater components will be at the front of the room, near the screen or video display. In designing the room layout, leave enough space between the system components and the screen so the components do not distract the eye while the theater system is in play. (The AVR21EN has front-panel timeout and brightness options, which allow dimming or turning off the front-panel display.)

Key to designing the home theater is knowing how it will be used. What are the homeowner’s habits? Are they critical movie buffs who want the full, big theater effect, or are they just casual viewers who want something better than just watching TV? Will they frequently be playing CDs or music from a server in the Main Room? Knowing this, along with considerations for room dimensions and layout, will help determine the configuration and placement of the theater speaker system. The AVR21EN is fully capable of supporting any audio mode from mono to 7.1 surround. When planning the speaker section of the main room, pull sufficient wire from the AVR21EN to all appropriate locations for accommodating 5.1 and

7.1 speaker systems, so that once the walls are sealed, the necessary wires will be in place for upgrading or changing the speaker configuration at a future date, should the homeowner decide to upgrade.

The same considerations should be given to the video section of the Home Theater. The homeowners may start out with an adequate 32" TV, but at some point may want to upgrade to a wall-mount LCD or plasma display. They may also consider hanging a projector and drop-screen once they get more familiar with the true Home Theater experience. Plan ahead. Have the homeowners consider these possibilities and suggest they incorporate the additional wiring during construction, so future upgrades can be accommodated without ripping the room apart.

System Planning

Shelf-Mounting: The hubs can lie flat on a shelf, when appropriate

in a given installation. Though the hubs typically run cool, adequate space should always be provided for airflow. Never place any object on top of a hub when shelf-mounted. Utilize the space created by the mounting flange for running wires underneath the hubs, when appropriate.

Wall-Mounting: The hubs can be mounted on an equipment cabinet

or wall surface. Drill small starter holes, using the hub-mounting screw holes for alignment. Sink mounting screws into wall studs when possible or mount a sheet of plywood slightly larger than the area required for the hubs to the wall surface, to ensure firm attachment. Leave several inches vertically between hubs, for pulling wires and making connections. Utilize the space created by the mounting flange for running wires underneath the hubs, when appropriate.

Panel-Mounting: The mounting screw holes on the AVH21 and

WPS21 hub flanges are configured for use with two popular brands of structured wiring panels: the Channel Vision C-0128E and Leviton Cat: 47605-28W. (These specific models will each accept three hubs.) Hubs can mount to either hole pattern, using standard nuts and bolts or the supplied locking pins.

KP21

The KP21 keypads must be mounted in standard two-gang electrical or low-voltage J-boxes in the Remote Rooms. Keypads are typically mounted at the entrance to a room near the light switch and other room controls. NEVER MOUNT A KEYPAD IN THE SAME J-BOX WITH A LIGHT SWITCH OR OTHER HIGH-VOLTAGE DEVICE.

The approved boxes are:

I Carlon BH235A (new work, closed box)

I Carlon BH234R (retrofit, closed box)

I Carlon SC200A (new work, open frame)

Pre-Wire

As part of system planning, full consideration should be given to the wiring infrastructure that will be required to utilize the maximum capabilities of the Audioaccess W.H.E.N.

Main Room

This section is an overview of the pre-wiring that should be done during construction and prior to installation for the Main Room section of the system.

AVR21EN

Speakers (Front, Side, Rear)

Pull quality, 16AWG, two-conductor stranded speaker wire from each speaker location to the AVR21EN. Each paired run (front right/left; side right/left; rear right/left) should be equal lengths to help ensure proper audio reproduction. Example: If the system components are installed on one side of the room and the front right speaker requires a 10-foot run, but the front left speaker requires a 20-foot run, both front speakers should have runs of 20 feet.

Remote Rooms

The AVR21EN has a special multiroom link that provides a network connection to the AVH21 audio/video hubs via Cat. 5e cable. The multiroom link feeds digital audio to the AVH21s for distribution to the KP21 keypads and receives control signals from the remote rooms for zone, source and system control. Each AVH21 requires a WPS21 power hub. The WPS21 provides individual power terminals to provide power to the AVH21 A/V hub and each of the keypads connected to that AVH21. Up to three AVH21/WPS21 sets can be used in a system for a maximum of 20 remote zones.

The AVR21EN also provides a dedicated composite video output for each source that gets connected to the AVH21s via RG6 coaxial cable terminated with F connectors.

When using multiple hubs, the multiroom link and video connections are “daisy-chained” from one hub to the next. The AVR21EN is connected to Hub 1 for Zones 1–7. Hub 1 is daisychained to Hub 2 for Zones 8–14, and Hub 2 is daisy-chained to Hub 3 for Zones 15–20.

One of the great features of the W.H.E.N. architecture is that the hubs can be installed just about anywhere. They can be installed in a utility area with structured wiring panels where the cable/satellite TV enters the home – up to 300 feet away from the AVR21EN. In other installations it may be more convenient to mount the hubs in the same location as the AVR21EN and source components, when installed in an equipment rack or closet.

The KP21 keypads have both line-level audio in and out connections. With input from the client, additional wiring may be required to connect a local audio source such as a DVD/CD player, video game or cable/satellite receiver. The variable line-level out may be used to incorporate a local high-power amplifier or powered subwoofer. Permanent connection from the keypads to wall plates may also be a consideration, making these in/outs available for use at a future time.

Given the layout of some rooms, the keypad location may be behind the user when sitting on a couch or chair. In these situations, an external IR receiver can be connected to the KP21 keypad. By mounting the IR receiver at the “focal point” of the room (i.e., the wall where the video display and speakers are located), the user can control the system with a KP21R remote without having to point back over his or her shoulder to use the eye on the keypad.

When designing the system, work closely with the homeowners to determine room layout, so speaker and video display placement can be set, and with that, keypad, IR receiver, speaker and video wiring can be properly planned and installed.

Mounting and Back Box Options

AVH21 and WPS21

Leave at least 3" between hubs for airflow and space for making connections. Though the hubs typically run cool, do not block any of the vent holes, as this can cause damage from overheating. The AVH21s and WPS21s can be wall-mounted or installed in the following optional-approved structured wiring boxes:

I Channel Vision C-0128E

I Leviton 47605-28W

System Planning

Video Monitor (Monitor Out, C-Video, S-Video, Monitor, Y/Pb/Pr)

If the video display is going to be mounted somewhere other than in the same wall unit as the AVR21EN, pull the recommended video cables and terminate with an appropriate wall plate. The AVR21EN will up-convert all video sources to component video or HDMI, so composite video and S-video cables typically will not be required. Pull four RG6 coaxial cables for component video and a spare, as well as an HDMI cable to where the Main Room video display will be mounted or to where a projector will be installed. Terminate with a multiterminal wall plate.

Main Room KP A/V

AUDIO – Pull shielded audio cable from the KP21 keypad that will

be used for the master keypad.

VIDEO – Pull RG6 coaxial cable from the AVH21 (available summer

2007) to the AVR21EN.

Trigger Out

Pull 24-18AWG two-conductor stranded wire from the AVR21EN to a device such as a screen, lift, drapes, etc., to be triggered with 12V.

Remote (External IR Receiver)

Pull 24-18AWG three-conductor, stranded nonshielded wire from where the IR receiver will be mounted to the AVR21EN.

Multiroom Link (Multiroom Application With Up to Two Remote Audio-Only Zones)

Pull one, Cat. 5e cable from each Multiroom Link terminal on the AVR21EN rear panel to each of up to two KP21 keypads, to provide control and digital audio signals for up to two Remote Rooms. It is highly recommended that these Cat. 5e cables be run through the location that would be used for installing AVH21 hubs, should the system be expanded for additional zones at a later date.

Multiroom Link (AVH21 Hub Multiroom Application Up to 20 Zones)

Pull one Cat. 5e cable from the AVR21EN to where the AVH21 A/V hubs will be installed.

Video Source Out (Multiroom Application Only)

Pull one RG6 coaxial cable for each source to be distributed to Remote Rooms from the AVR21EN to the AVH21(s) to provide composite video to the Remote Rooms. Pulling coaxial for all six common sources is recommended, even if there will not initially be six A/V components.

NOTE: All other connections will be done after construction and

installation are finished. See also

AVR21EN Connections for

additional information.

Pre-Wire

Remote Rooms

This section is an overview of the pre-wiring that should be done during construction and prior to installation for the Remote Room sections of the system.

AVH21

KP 1-20 (KP21 Keypads) – Pull a home run of Cat. 5e cable from

each KP21 keypad location to the appropriate AHV21 for zone control and digital audio distribution to the Remote Rooms.

Video Output – Pull a home run of RG6 coaxial cable from the

video display location in each Remote Room to the appropriate AVH21.

Video Input (Cam 1-7) – Pull a home run of RG6 coaxial cable

from each video camera location to the AVH21 #1.

Door 1 – Pull two-conductor 24-18AWG stranded wire from the

door-entry device to be controlled by “Door 1” to the appropriate AVH21.

Door 2 – Pull two-conductor 24-18AWG stranded wire from the

door-entry device to be controlled by “Door 2” to the appropriate AVH21.

NOTE: If using two AVH21 A/V hubs, up to four door-entry devices

can be controlled. If using three AVH21 A/V hubs, up to six doorentry devices can be controlled. Pull two-conductor 24-18AWG stranded wire from the additional door-entry devices to the AVH21 hubs, as required.

WPS21

KP 1-20 – Pull four-conductor, 14-AWG (recommended for use at

wire length distances of up to 330 feet between WPS21 and KP21) or 16AWG (up to 150 feet) stranded wire from each KP21 keypad location to the appropriate WPS21(s) to provide power to the keypad.

Hub – Pull four-conductor, 14-AWG from the WPS21 to the AVH21.

KP21

AUX-IN – Pull shielded stereo audio cable from the keypad location

in a zone to where a local device (DVD/CD player, video game, local cable/satellite receiver) or wall plate will be installed in that zone.

PRE-OUT – Pull shielded stereo audio cable from the keypad loca-

tion in a zone to where a local device (high power-amplifier or powered subwoofer) or wall plate will be installed in that zone.

IR Input – Pull (minimum) three-conductor 24-AWG from the

KP21 location to the remote IR sensor location.

NOTE: All other connections will be done after construction and

installation are finished. See also

AVH21 Connections, WPS21

Connections

and KP21 Connections for additional information.

Doorbell Keypad (available Summer 2007) –

The W.H.E.N. system will be compatible with the Channel Vision doorbell stations. Pull the appropriate wire to the AVH21. Please contact Audioaccess Technical Support for more information.

System Planning

17. Digital Input/Coaxial 3 Input/Output Status Indicator

18. Tuner Mode Selector

19. Game/Cam Component Video Input

20. Game/Cam S-Video Input

21. Game/Cam Input/Output Status Indicator

22. Game/Cam Composite Video Input

23. Game/Cam Line-Level Audio Inputs

24. Main Room Volume Control

25. Information Display

26. Delay Adjust Selector

27. Digital Input Selector

28. Channel Adjust Selector

29. Speaker Selector

30. Tone Mode Selector

31. IR Remote Sensor Window

1. Main Power Switch

2. Standby/On Button

3. Headphone Jack

4. Surround Mode Group Selector

5. Surround Mode Selector

6. Tuning Selector

7. Mode Adjust Down

8. Mode Set

9. Mode Adjust Up

10. Tuner Band Selector

11. Preset Station Selector

12. Optimizer Mic Input

13. Optical 3 Digital Input

14. Optical 3 Digital Output

15. Input Source Selector

16. Coaxial 3 Digital Input/Output

Set

Surr. Mode

Surr. Selec

tTuningAM/FM

eset

Source

Tun

Mode

Optimizer MIC In Out In/out

Optical 3 Coaxial 3

Game/Cam

Y Pb Pr S-Video Video L-A

udio-R

13 141516

19 20 22

2426

2528

2930

AVR21EN Front-Panel Features

Figure 1.

AVR21EN Front Panel

 Main Power Switch: Press this switch to apply power to the

AVR21EN. When the switch is pressed in, the unit is placed in a Standby mode, as indicated by the light in the

Standby/On Button

turning red. The switch MUST be pressed in to operate the unit. To turn the unit off and prevent the use of the remote control, this switch should be pressed until it pops out from the front panel. NOTE: This switch is normally left in the “ON” position.

1 Standby/On Button: When the Main Power Switch is pressed

in so that it is in the “ON” position, press this button to turn the AVR21EN on. When the unit is in the Standby mode, the light in the middle of the button is red. When the unit is on, the light in the button is green.

2 Headphone Jack: This jack may be used to listen to the

AVR21EN’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4" stereo phone plug, or that you use an adapter, as needed, to convert the plug on your headphones to the 1/4" jack used on the AVR. When the headphone jack is in use, the Main Room speakers will automatically be turned off and the unit will output a standard stereo signal. You may also use one of the Dolby Headphone modes for an enhanced listening experience. For more information on headphone listening, see the

Main Room Operation/Volume and Tone Control section.

3 Surround Mode Group Selector: Press this button to select the

top-level group of surround modes. Each press of the button will select one of the surround mode categories. Once the button is pressed so that the name of the desired surround mode category appears in the on-screen display and in the

Lower Display Line



, press the Surround Mode Selector 4 to cycle through the

individual modes available. For example, press this button to select Dolby modes, and then press the

Surround Mode Selector 4 to

choose from the various mode options.

4 Surround Mode Selector: Press this button to select from

among the available surround mode options for the surround mode category selected. The specific modes will vary based on the number of speakers available, the surround mode category and whether the input source is digital or analog. For example, press the

Surround Mode Group Selector 3 to select a category such

as Dolby or Logic 7, and then press this button to see the specific mode choices that are available. For more information on mode selection, see the

Main Room Operation/Surround Mode

Selection

and Digital Audio Playback sections.

5 Tuning Selector: Press the left side of the button to tune

lower-frequency stations and the right side of the button to tune higher-frequency stations. When the tuner is in the

MANUAL/MONO mode, each tap of the selector will increase

or decrease the frequency by one increment. When the tuner receives a strong-enough signal for adequate reception,

MANUAL TUNED will appear in the Lower Display Line 

and in the on-screen display. When the tuner is in the

AUTO/STEREO mode, press the button once, and the tuner

will scan for a station with acceptable signal strength. When the next higher – or lower – frequency station with a strong-enough signal is tuned, the frequency scan will stop and the

Lower Display

Line 

and the on-screen display will indicate AUTO TUNED.

When an FM Stereo station is tuned, the display will read

AUTO

ST TUNED.

See the Main Room Operation/Tuner Operation

section for more information on using the tuner.

6 Mode Adjust Down: Press to move down in menu options

when used with the

Tone , Speaker , Channel R, Digital

Sel Q

and Delay Mode P buttons. Within some selected modes,

press to adjust parameter values down.

7 Mode Set: This button has two functions. Press it to turn the

video processing circuits on or off, as indicated by

FAROUDJA:ON

or FAROUDJA:OFF messages in the Upper Display Line  and semi-OSD display. Press to select Mode subsettings when adjusting Tone, Speaker, Channel, Digital Sel and Delay Mode parameters. For example, press

Tone Mode . TONE IN/OUT

will appear on the Lower Display Line . Press one of the Mode

Adjust Buttons 68

to select TONE IN. Press Tone Mode 

again. TREBLE MODE will appear in the lower display line. Press the

Set Button 7. The numeric value for the treble adjust-

ment will appear in the

Lower Display Line . Either adjust the

value with one of the

Mode Adjust Buttons 68 or press the Set Button 7 again. TREBLE MODE will again appear in the Lower Display Line . Press Tone Mode  again and BASS

MODE

will appear in the Lower Display Line . Repeat the

button press sequence to adjust Bass. This sequence of button presses will allow you to change settings when using the

Tone ,

Speaker , Channel R, Digital Sel Q and Delay Mode P

buttons.

8 Mode Adjust Up: Press to move down in menu options when

used with the

Tone , Speaker , Channel R, Digital Sel Q

and Delay Mode P buttons. Within some selected Modes, press to adjust parameter values up.

9 Tuner Band Selector: Pressing this button once will switch the

AVR to the Tuner mode. Pressing it again will switch between the AM and FM frequency bands.

A Preset Station Selector: Press this button to scroll up or

down through the list of stations that have been entered into the preset memory. See the

Main Room Operation/Tuner Operation

section for more information on tuner programming.

B Optimizer Mic Input: 3.5mm mini jack for use with the included

EzSet/EQ Microphone for calibrating room EQ, and speaker output levels.

C Optical 3 Digital Input: Connect the optical digital output of

an audio or video product to this jack. Select Game/Cam as Source.

D Optical 3 Digital Output: Connect this jack to the optical digi-

tal audio input of a compatible digital recorder. Select a source with digital audio for signal.

E Input Source Selector: Press this button to change the input

by scrolling up or down through the list of input sources.

F Coaxial 3 Digital Input/Output: Connect the coaxial digital

output of a digital audio product such as a portable audio player or video game to this jack when switched as an input. Connect this jack to the optical digital audio input of a compatible digital recorder when switched as an output.

G Coaxial 3 – Input/Output Status Indicator: This LED indicator

will normally light green to show that the front-panel

Coaxial 3

Digital Input/Output Jack F

is operating as an input. When this jack is configured for use as an output, the LED will turn red to show that the jack may be used as an output for recording. See the

Main Room Operation/Front Panel Connections section for

more information on configuring the front-panel jacks as outputs, rather than inputs.

AVR21EN Front-Panel Features

Q Digital Input Selector: Press this button to begin the process

of selecting a digital source for use with the currently selected input. Once the button has been pressed, use the

Mode Adjust Buttons

to choose the desired input and then press the Set Button

to enter the setting into the unit’s memory. See the Main Room

Operation/Surround Mode Selection, Digital Audio Playback

and Recording sections for more information on digital audio.

R Channel Adjust Selector: Press the button to begin the

process of adjusting the channel level outputs using the source currently playing through your AVR. For complete information on adjusting the channel output level, see the

Main Room

Operation/Output Level Trim Adjustment

section.

 Speaker Selector: Press this button to begin the process of

configuring the AVR21EN for the type of speakers it is being used with. For complete information on configuring the speaker settings, see the

AVR21EN Configuration/Speaker Setup section.

 Tone Mode Selector: This button controls the tone mode

settings, enabling adjustment of the bass and treble boost/cut. You may also use it to take the tone controls out of the signal path completely for “flat” response. The first press of the button displays a

TONE IN message in the Lower Display Line  and in the

on-screen display. To take the controls out of the signal path, press either of the

Mode Adjust Buttons 68 until the display reads

TONE OUT. To change the bass or treble settings, press the

button again until the desired option appears in the

Lower

Display Line 

and in the on-screen display and then press either

of the

Mode Adjust Buttons 68 to enter the desired boost or

cut setting. See the

Main Room Operation/Volume and Tone

Control

section for more information on the tone controls.

 IR Remote Sensor Window: The sensor behind this window

receives infrared signals from the remote control. Aim the remote at this area and do not block or cover it unless an external remote sensor is installed.

H Tuner Mode Selector: Press this button to select Auto or

Manual tuning. When the button is pressed so that

AUTO/STEREO appears in the Upper Display Line , the

tuner will search for the next station with an acceptable signal when the

Tuning Selector Button 5 is pressed. When the button

is pressed so that

MANUAL/MONO appears in the Upper

Display Line 

, each press of the Tuning Selector Button 5

will increase the frequency by one increment. This button may also be used to switch between Stereo and Mono modes for FM radio reception. When weak reception is encountered, select the Manual/Mono tuning mode. Press again to switch back to Auto/Stereo mode. See the

Main Room Operation/Tuner

Operation

section for more information on using the tuner.

I Game/Cam Component Video Input: These component

video jacks may be used as either inputs or outputs for temporary connection to video games or portable audio/video products such as a camcorder. See the

Main Room Operation/Front-Panel

Connections

section for more information on switching these

jacks between an input and output.

J Game/Cam S-Video Input: This S-video jack may be used as

either an input or output for temporary connection to video games or portable audio/video products such as a camcorder. See the

Main

Room Operation/Front-Panel Connections

section for more

information on switching these jacks between an input and output.

K Game/Cam Input/Output Status Indicator: This LED indicator

will normally light green to show that the front panel Game/Cam Input/Output Jacks are operating as inputs. When these jacks are configured for use as outputs, the LED will turn red to show that the jacks may be used as an output for recording. See the

Main

Room Operation/Front-Panel Connections

section for more information on configuring the front-panel jacks as outputs, rather than inputs.

L Game/Cam Composite Video Input: This composite video

jack may be used as either an input or output for temporary connection to video games or portable audio/video products such as a camcorder. See the

Main Room Operation/Front-Panel

Connections

section for more information on switching these

jacks between an input and output.

M Game/Cam Line-Level Audio Inputs: These audio jacks may

be used as either inputs or outputs for temporary connection to video games or portable audio/video products such as camcorders and portable audio players. See the

Main Room Operation/

Front-Panel Connections

section for more information on switch-

ing these jacks between an input and output.

N Main Room Volume Control: Turn this knob clockwise to

increase the volume, counterclockwise to decrease the volume. If the AVR21EN is muted, adjusting the volume control will automatically release the unit from the silenced condition.

O Information Display: This display delivers messages and status

information to help you operate the AVR21EN. See the

Front-Panel

Information Display Features

section for a complete explanation

of the display.

P Delay Adjust Selector: Press this button to begin the process

of adjusting the delay settings. See the

Speaker Setup/Speaker

Distances

section for more information on delay adjustments.

AVR21EN Front-Panel Features

 Surround Mode Indicators: One of these indicators will light

to show the surround mode in use. Depending on the specific combination of input sources and surround mode selected, more than one indicator may light. See the

Main Room Operation/

Surround Mode Selection

and Digital Audio Playback sections

for more information.

 Upper Display Line: Depending on the unit’s status, a variety

of messages will appear here. In normal operation, this line will show the current input source and identify whether an analog or digital input is in use. When the tuner is selected as the input, this line will identify the station as AM or FM, and show the frequency and preset number, if any.

 Lower Display Line: Depending on the unit’s status, a variety

of messages will appear here. In normal operation, the current surround mode will appear on this line.

 Speaker/Channel Input Indicators: These indicators are

multipurpose, indicating both the speaker type selected for each channel and the number of audio channels available. The speaker indicators light as a single outline around the speaker position indicator when a “small” speaker is selected and as a larger icon with three connected boxes when “large” speakers are selected. When only the speaker position letters appear, no speaker has been assigned to that position. See the

AVR21EN Configuration/

Speaker Setup

section for more information on configuring speakers.

The letters inside each box also indicate the active input channels. For standard analog inputs, only the L and R will light, indicating a stereo input. For a digital source, the indicators will light to display the channels being received at the digital input. When the letters flash, the digital input has been interrupted and an

UNLOCK

message may appear in the Lower Display Line . See the

AVR21EN Front Panel Information Display Features/Speaker/ Channel Input Indicators

section for more information on the

Channel Indicators.

 Input Indicators: One of these indicators will light to identify

the currently selected input. Note that the entire list will light briefly each time the unit is turned on, as a test.

AVR21EN Front-Panel Information Display Features

Figure 2.

AVR21EN Front-Panel Information Display

32. Surround Mode Indicators

33. Upper Display Line

34. Lower Display Line

35. Speaker/Channel Input Indicators

36. Input Indicators

12. Disc 3 Component Video Inputs

13. Cable/Sat Component Video Inputs

14. AUX Component Video Inputs

15. Monitor Component Video Outputs

16. Preamp Outputs

17. Subwoofer Output

18. HDMI Output

19. Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs

20. Center Speaker Output

21. Back Surround Speaker Outputs (7.1-Channel Only)

1. Disc 1 Analog Audio/Video Inputs

2. Disc 2 Analog Audio/Video Inputs

3. Disc 3 Analog Audio/Video Inputs

4. VR Analog Audio/Video Inputs

5. VR Analog Audio/Video Outputs

6. Cable/Sat Analog Audio/Video Inputs

7. AUX Analog Audio/Video Inputs

8. AUX Analog Audio/Video Outputs

9. Disc 1 Component Video Inputs

10. Disc 2 Component Video Inputs

11. 8-Channel DVD Audio Inputs

AVR21EN Rear-Panel Features

RADIO 2

RADIO 1

DISC 1

DISC2/SAT RADIO

DISC 3/MP3

VR AUX

DISC 2/SAT RADIO DISC 3/MP3

DISC 3/MP3

CABLE/SAT

DISC 3/MP3DISC 2/SAT RADIO

3334

3536

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

12 13 14

24 25

26 27

31 32

KP A/V MONITOR

DISC 2/SAT RADIO

DISC 3/

MP3

DISC 2/

SAT RADIO

DISC 1

Figure 3.

AVR21EN Rear Panel

22. Side Surround (7.1-Channel) or Surround (5.1-Channel) Speaker Outputs

23. Front Speaker Outputs

24. Optical Digital Audio Inputs

25. Optical Digital Audio Output

26. Coaxial Digital Audio Output

27. Remote IR Output

28. Remote IR Input

29. RS-232 Port

30. Multiroom Link

31. Switched AC Outlet

32. Unswitched AC Outlet

33. AC Power Cord Jack

34. Source Control 2-Way Interface Terminals

35. Common IR Control Output

36. Source IR Control Outputs

37. Video Source Outputs

38. 12V Trigger Output

39. Source SPF (Source Power Flag) Inputs

40. Monitor Composite and S-Video Outputs

41. Main Room Keypad Audio Input

42. Main Room Keypad Composite Video Input

43. Tuner 1 FM Antenna Jack

44. Tuner 1 AM Antenna Terminals

45. Tuner 2 FM Antenna Jack

46. Tuner 2 AM Antenna Terminals

 Disc 1 Analog Audio/Video Inputs:

Connect the left/right analog audio and composite or S-video jacks of a DVD/CD player or other video source to these jacks. When digital audio and/or component video outputs are used with a DVD/CD player and the AVR21EN, the default connection points are the

Coaxial 1 Digital

Audio Input 

and the Disc 1 Component Video Inputs . To

select an alternate digital audio input, the AVR may be reconfigured by using the

MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu as described in Main

Room Setup/Source Audio Input.

 Disc 2 Analog Audio/Video Inputs:

Coaxial 2 Digital

Audio Input 

and the Disc 2 Component Video Inputs . To

select an alternate digital audio input, the AVR may be reconfigured by using the MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu as described in

Main

Room Setup/Source Audio Input

 Disc 3 Analog Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the left/right

analog audio and composite or S-video jacks of a DVD/CD player or other video source to these jacks. When digital audio and/or component video outputs are used with a DVD/CD player and the AVR21EN, the default connection points are the

Optical 2 Digital

Audio Input 

and the Disc 3 Component Video Inputs . To

select an alternate digital audio input, the AVR may be reconfigured by using the MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu as described in

Main

Room Setup/Source Audio Input.

 VR Analog Audio/Video Inputs:

Connect the left /right analog audio and composite or S-Video PLAY/OUT jacks of a video recording device such as a VCR, TiVo,

or DVD recorder to these jacks. The AVR21EN’s remote control library has a variety of video recorders available as default devices for this input, but you may connect any video source such as a VCR, HDTV or cable set-top box, PVR or other device to these inputs. Note that if the device offers digital audio, those connections will have to be made separately, and the AVR21EN configured accordingly.

 VR Analog Audio/Video Outputs: Connect the left/right

analog audio and composite or S-video RECORD IN jacks of a video recording device such as a DVD recorder, personal video recorder or VCR to these jacks.

 Cable/Sat Analog Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the left/right

analog audio and composite or S-video jacks of a cable box or satellite receiver to these jacks. The AVR21EN’s remote control has Cable, Satellite or Off-Air as the default devices available for this input, but you may connect any audio/video source such as a DVD/CD player, VCR, personal video recorder, or other device to these inputs. Note that if the source device offers either digital audio or component video capability, those connections must be made separately, and the AVR21EN configured accordingly.

 AUX Analog Audio Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the

left/right analog audio and composite or S-video jacks of an audio/video device to these jacks. You may connect any audio/video source such as a VCR, HDTV receiver, or other device to these inputs. Note that if the source device offers either digital audio or component video capability, those connections must be made separately, and the AVR21EN configured accordingly.

AVR21EN Rear-Panel Features

NOTE: To assist in making the correct connections for multichannel

input, output and speaker connections, all connection jacks and terminals are color-coded in conformance with the latest CEA

standards, as follows:

Front Left: White Front Right: Red Center: Green Surround Left: Blue Surround Right: Gray Surround Back Left: Brown Surround Back Right: Tan

Subwoofer: Purple Digital Audio: Orange Composite Video: Yellow Component Video “Y”: Green Component Video “Pr”: Red Component Video “Pb”: Blue

 HDMI Output: Connect this jack to the HDMI input on a

projector or monitor. HDMI connections should be restricted to a maximum cable length of about 50 feet.

 Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs: Connect the coaxial digital

output from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing MP3 files or streams, LD player or CD player to these jacks. The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source. Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to these jacks.

Coaxial 1  is assigned as the default to Disc 1 and Coaxial 2 

is assigned as the default to Disc 2, but both can be reconfigured as optional inputs to other sources.

 Center Speaker Outputs: Connect these outputs to the

matching + and – terminals on your center channel speaker. In conformance with the CEA color-code specification, the green terminal is the positive (+) terminal that should be connected to the red (+) terminal on speakers with the older color-coding. Connect the black (–) terminal on the AVR to the black negative (–) terminal on your speaker. See the

Main Room Installation

& Setup/Speaker Connections

section for more information

on speaker polarity.

 Back Surround Speaker Outputs (7.1-Channel Only):

Connect these speaker terminals to the surround back left/surround back right speakers in a 7.1- channel system. In normal surround system use, the brown and black terminals are the surround back left channel positive (+) and negative (–) connections and the tan and black terminals are the surround back right positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.

 Side Surround (7.1-Channel) or Surround (5.1-Channel) Speaker Outputs:

Connect these outputs to the matching + and – terminals on your surround channel speakers. In conformance with the CEA color-code specification, the blue terminal is the positive (+) terminal that should be connected to the red (+) terminal on the Surround Left speaker with older color-coding, while the gray terminal should be connected to the red (+) terminal on the Surround Right speaker with the older color-coding. Connect the black (–) terminal on the AVR to the matching black negative (–) terminals for each surround speaker. See the

Main Room Installation

& Setup/Speaker Connections

section for more information on

speaker polarity.

 Front Speaker Outputs: Connect these outputs to the matching

+ or – terminals on your left and right speakers. When making speaker connections, always make certain to maintain correct polarity by connecting the color-coded (white for front left and red for front right) (+) terminals on the AVR21EN to the red (+) terminals on the speakers and the black (–) terminals on the AVR21EN to the black (–) terminals on the speakers. See the

Main Room Installation

& Setup/Speaker Connections

section for more information on

speaker polarity.

 Optical Digital Audio Inputs: Connect the optical digital out-

put from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing MP3 files or streams, LD player or CD player to these jacks. The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal, a DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source.

Optical 2  is

assigned as the default for Disc 3 but can be reconfigured as an optional input to another source.

 AUX Analog Audio/Video Outputs: Connect the left/right

analog audio and composite or S-video RECORD IN jacks of a video recording device such as a DVD recorder, personal video recorder or VCR, to these jacks.

 Disc 1 Component Video Inputs: Connect the component

video outputs of a DVD player or any other video source equipped with Y/Pr/Pb or RGB component video outputs to these jacks. The factory default is for these jacks to be linked to the

Disc 1 Analog

Audio Inputs 

and the Coaxial 1 Digital Audio Input , but

you may change the digital audio input setting at any time through the

MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu, as described in Main

Room Setup/Source Audio Input.

See the Main Room

Setup/Source Video

section for more information on configuring

the component video inputs.

 Disc 2 Component Video Inputs: Connect the component

video outputs of a DVD player or any other video source equipped with Y/Pr/Pb or RGB component video outputs to these jacks. The factory default is for these jacks to be linked to the

Disc 2 Analog

Audio Inputs 

and the Coaxial 2 Digital Audio Inputs , but

you may change the digital audio input setting at any time through the

MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu, as described in Main

Room Setup/Source Audio Input.

See the Main Room Setup/

Source Video

section for more information on configuring the

component video inputs.

 8-Channel DVD Audio Inputs: These jacks are used for connec-

tion to source devices such as DVD-Audio or SACD

™

players with discrete analog outputs. Depending on the source device in use, all eight jacks may be used, though in many cases only connections to the front left/right, center, surround left/right and LFE (subwoofer input) jacks will be used for standard 5.1 audio signals.

 Disc 3 Component Video Inputs: Connect the component

video outputs of a DVD player or any other video source equipped with Y/Pr/Pb or RGB component video outputs to these jacks. The factory default is for these jacks to be linked to the

Disc 3 Analog Audio Inputs 

and the Optical 2 Digital Audio Inputs , but

you may change the digital audio input setting at any time through the

MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu, as described in Main

Room Setup/Source Audio Input.

See the Main Room Setup/

Source Video

section for more information on configuring the

component video inputs.

 Cable/Sat Component Video Inputs: These inputs may be

used with any video source device equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb component video outputs. These jacks are permanently linked to the Cable/Satellite source input.

 AUX Component Video Inputs: These inputs may be used with

any video source device equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb component video outputs. These jacks are permanently linked to the AUX source input.

 Monitor Component Video Outputs: Connect these outputs to

the component video inputs on the Main Room video projector or monitor.

 Preamp Outputs: Connect these jacks to an optional, external

power amplifier for applications where higher power is desired.

 Subwoofer Output: Connect this jack to the line-level input of

a powered subwoofer. If an external subwoofer amplifier is used, connect this jack to the subwoofer amplifier input.

AVR21EN Rear-Panel Features

 Optical Digital Audio Output: Connect this jack to the optical

digital input connector on a CD R/RW, MiniDisc or other compatible digital recorder.

 Coaxial Digital Audio Output: Connect this jack to the coaxial

digital input of a CD-R/RW, MiniDisc or other compatible digital recorder.

 Remote IR Output: This connection permits the IR sensor in

the receiver to serve other remote-controlled devices. Connect this jack to the “IR IN” jack on appropriately compatible IR-controlled equipment.

 Remote IR Input: If the AVR21EN’s front-panel IR sensor is

blocked due to cabinet doors or other obstructions, an external IR sensor may be used. Connect the output of the sensor to this jack.

 RS-232 Port: This jack is currently used for factory testing and

software updates only.

 Multiroom Link: These two RJ45 jacks may be used to add

up to 20 additional rooms of audio/video signal distribution and system control when connected to Audioaccess W.H.E.N. AVH21 audio/video hubs. They may also be used to add two additional rooms of audio distribution when each is connected directly to an Audioaccess W.H.E.N. KP21 Keypad. See the

Main Room

Installation & Setup/Multiroom Link

and AVH21 Connections/

Uplink/Multiroom Link

sections for additional information.

 Switched AC Outlet: This outlet may be used to power AC

devices that you wish to have turn on and off when the AVR is turned on or off. The total power consumption of all devices connected to the switched outlet may not exceed 100 watts.

 Unswitched AC Outlet: This outlet may be used to power

any AC device as long as its power consumption does not exceed 100 watts. The power will remain available at this outlet as long as the AVR21EN is plugged into an AC power source, regardless of whether the AVR itself is on or off.

 AC Power Cord Jack: Connect the AC power cord to this jack

when the installation is complete. To ensure safe operation, use only the power cord supplied with the unit. If a replacement is required, it must be of the same type and capacity.

 Source Control 2-Way Interface Terminals: Connect these

terminals to the RS-232 terminals on Sony ES DVD changers connected to the corresponding audio/video inputs. EXAMPLE: Connect the Disc 1 interface terminal to the DVD changer connected to the Disc 1 inputs. This connection will provide information regarding disc, track and chapter on the

KP21 Keypad Information

Display

. NOTE: This connection does not provide a control interface. An IR emitter should also be connected to the AVR and attached to the changer to ensure full control capabilities. These inputs are also used for connection to XM/Sirius Satellite Radio Tuners and Audioaccess aDock for iPod. Please see detailed instructions in the hardware connection section of this manual for setails

 Common IR Control Output: Connect this output to an IR

emitter or direct-control device that is to be controlled via IR from all rooms or when any source is selected on a remote or keypad.

 Source IR Control Outputs: Connect these outputs to IR

emitters and attach the emitters over the IR eyes of the source components to be controlled by the AVR via infrared. These are dedicated (routed) IR outputs allowing selective control of multiple same-brand same-model devices, such as multiple DVD players, satellite receivers, etc. The jacks are labeled to correspond with the AVR21EN Source Inputs.

 Video Source Outputs: Connect these composite video outputs

to the appropriate video inputs on the primary AVH21 audio/video hub for distribution of common-source composite video signals when expanding the AVR21EN in a multiroom application.

 12V Trigger Output: Connect this output to a 12V triggered

device such as a screen, lift or lighting system that is to be controlled with a constant 12V signal. See the

Home Theater Master Control/

Voltage Trigger

section.

 Source SPF (Source Power Flag) Inputs: Connect the 12V

Control Out of an Audioaccess SPF-1 or other sensing device to provide source power ON/OFF status to the AVR21EN. These inputs must be configured in

Remote Control Setup/On Off Comm.

 Monitor Video Outputs:

When using an analog video display that has only standard composite and S-video inputs, connect these jacks (depending on which types of video are output by your source devices) to the matching inputs on your television or video display. When using a “digital ready” or HDTV display that is compatible with 420p or higher inputs, you do not need to make these connections, as all incoming video will be up-scaled to 1080i and sent through the

Monitor Component Video  or HDMI

Jacks 

with the OSD messages.

 Main Room KP A/V Audio Input: Connect this jack to the

line-level audio output of the KP21 designated as the Main Room keypad to hear the paging audio through the AVR21.

 Main Room KP A/V Composite Video Input: Connect this

jack to the appropriate video output from the AVH21 for the Main Room keypad.

 Tuner 1 FM Antenna Jack: Connect the supplied indoor or an

optional external FM antenna to this terminal.

 Tuner 1 AM Antenna Terminals: Connect the AM loop antenna

supplied with the receiver to these terminals. If an external AM antenna is used, make connections to the AM and GND terminals in accordance with the instructions supplied with the antenna.

 Tuner 2 FM Antenna Jack: Connect the supplied indoor or an

optional external FM antenna to this terminal.

 Tuner 2 AM Antenna Terminals: Connect the AM loop anten-

na supplied with the receiver to these terminals. If an external AM antenna is used, make connections to the AM and GND terminals in accordance with the instructions supplied with the instructions supplied with the antenna.

AVR21EN Rear-Panel Features

AVH21 Front/Rear-Panel Features

131415

Figure 4.

AVH21 Front Panel

Figure 5.

AVH21 Rear Panel

9. Power In

10. Door 1 12/24V DC Latching Trigger Output

11. Door 1 Dry Contact Latching Trigger Output

12. Door 1 12/24V DC Selector

13. Door 2 12/24V DC Latching Trigger Output

14. Door 2 Dry-Contact Latching Trigger Output

15. Door 2 12/24V DC Selector

16. Uplink Terminal

1. Source Video Bypass Outputs

2. Keypad/Zone Video Outputs

3. Camera Video Bypass Outputs

4. AVH21 Mounting Flange

5. KP21 Keypad Terminals

6. Expansion/Auxiliary Keypad Terminal

7. Camera Video Inputs

8. Source Video Inputs

Door 1 Dry-Contact Latching Trigger Output:

One two-position plug-in terminal connects to a remote door lock that requires a latching dry-contact closure to activate. (This type of door lock system would provide its own power to activate when the circuit is closed; therefore, 0 voltage, or a “dry closure,” is used.)

Door 1 12V/24V DC Selector:

One two-position switch sets

the output voltage for the

Door 1 12V/24V DC Latching Trigger

Output

. Set to 12V for door locks requiring up to 12 volts; set

to 24V for door locks requiring between 12 and 24 volts.

Door 2 12V/24V DC Latching Trigger Output:

One two-position plug-in terminal connects to a voltage-activated door lock. Selectable 12V or 24V DC output allows remote control of voltageactivated door locks.

Door 2 Dry-Contact Latching Trigger Output:

Door 2 12V/24V DC Selector:

One two-position switch sets

the output voltage for the

Door 2 12V/24V DC Latching Trigger

Output

. Set to 12V for door locks requiring up to 12 volts; set

to 24V for door locks requiring between 12 and 24 volts.

Uplink Terminal: One RJ45 jack connects to the Multiroom

Link 

on the AVR21EN rear panel. This link allows two-way communication of zone/system control from connected KP21 keypads. Digital audio data for common-source audio distribution is also provided via this connection. The Uplink terminal connects to the

Expansion/AUX KP Terminal on the previous sequential

AVH21 to loop control and digital audio data when using multiple AVH21s in expanded systems (i.e.,

AVH21 Hub 1 Expansion/AUX KP

Terminal

connects to the AVH21 Hub 2 Uplink Terminal ).

Source Video Bypass Outputs: Six female F-type terminals

output the composite video signals connected to the

AVH21

Source Video Inputs

for distribution of the six commonsource components connected to the AVR21EN to additional AVH21 hubs, for additional zones in expanded systems.

Keypad/Zone Video Outputs: Six female F-type terminals

output common-source composite video to the video displays in the individual zones as selected by the zone keypads or remotes.

Camera Video Bypass Outputs: Seven female F-type

terminals output composite video from security or zone monitor cameras connected to the

AVH21 Camera Video Inputs for

distribution to additional AVH21 hubs, for additional zones in expanded systems.

AVH21 Mounting Flange: Chassis metal extensions on either

side of the AVH21 used for vertical installation to structured wiring panel or wall surfaces using mounting holes.

KP21 Keypad Terminals: Seven RJ45 jacks connect to the

individual KP21 keypads in each zone. These terminals provide two-way communication between the keypads and AVH21 hubs; and AVR21EN multiroom system controller for source/zone/system control. They also output digital audio data to the keypad amplifiers for audio from common-source components as selected by the zone keypads or remotes.

Expansion/Auxiliary Keypad Terminal: One RJ45 jack

connects to the

Uplink Terminal on the next sequential

AVH21 hub to loop data for zone/system control and digital audio distribution when using multiple AVH21s for additional zones in expanded systems.

Camera Video Inputs: Seven female F-type terminals

connect to the composite video outputs on security or zone monitor cameras. The primary AVH21 connects directly to the camera outputs while the secondary hubs connect to the

Camera Video

Bypass Outputs

on the previous hub in the distribution chain

(i.e.,

AVH21 Hub 1 Camera Video Bypass Outputs connect

AVH21 Hub 2 Camera Video Inputs ).

Source Video Inputs: Six female F-type terminals connect to

the

Video Source Out Terminals  on the AVR21EN rear panel

for input of common-source composite video feeds. The primary AVH21 connects directly to the AVR21EN outputs while the secondary hubs connect to the

Source Video Bypass Outputs on the

previous hub in the distribution chain (i.e.,

AVH21 Hub 1 Source

Video Bypass Outputs

connect to AVH21 Hub 2 Source

Video Inputs

). These inputs allow selection of any available common-source video signal to be selected by a zone keypad or remote.

Power In: One four position plug-in terminal for connection to

WPS21 power supply hub

AVH21 A/V Hub Power Terminal

Door 1 12V/24V DC Latching Trigger Output:

One two-position plug-in terminal connects to a voltage-activated door lock. Selectable 12V or 24V DC output allows remote control of voltageactivated door locks.

AVH21 Front/Rear-Panel Features

AVH21 Top/Status-Panel Features

232

Figure 6.

AVH21 Top Panel

Figure 7.

AVH21 Status Panel

23. Expansion Hub Connection Indicator

24. Uplink Activity Indicator

25. Keypad Connection Indicators

26. Door 1 Trigger Output Indicator (Open/Close A)

27. Door 2 Trigger Output Indicator (Open/Close B)

17. AVH21 Status Panel

18. Hub Configuration Switch

19. Mounting Screw Holes

20. Reset Button

21. Power Indicator

22. Hub Connection Indicator

AVH21 Mounting Flange: See the AVH21 Front/Rear-Panel

Features

section previous to this.

AVH21 Status Panel: One adhesive lexan label fits into the

recess on the AVH21 top panel to indicate power, hub connection, uplink activity, keypad connections and door-latch relay activity. Three different labels provide proper identification of keypad/zone configuration by hub (i.e., Hub 1, keypads/Zones 1–7; Hub 2, keypads/Zones 8 –14; Hub 3, keypads/Zones 15–20) for confirmation of connections and activity during installation and troubleshooting. The individual labels are “keyed” for the

Hub Configuration

Switch

that identifies the hub number and zone group.

Hub Configuration Switch: One three-position switch deter-

mines the hub number and zone group as identified on the appropriate status panel label. The individual labels are screened and “keyed” to match the three-position switch that sets the hub number and zone groups. The up position sets Hub 1, Zones 1–7; the middle position sets Hub 2, Zones 8–14; the down position sets Hub 3, Zones 15–20.

Mounting Screw Holes: Eight slots, four on each mounting

flange, used for attaching the AVH21 to a structured wiring panel or wall surface. These holes are punched to fit the hole patterns on the Channel Vision C-0128E and Leviton 47605-28W structured wiring panels. (These specific models will each accept three hubs.)

Reset Button: One recessed button – press to reset the AVH21

if communication between keypads and AVR21EN locks up.

Power Indicator: One red LED lights up when the AVH21

is connected to the

AV/Audio Hub Power Terminal on a

WPS21 power hub and is receiving power.

Hub Connection Indicator: One green LED lights up to indi-

cate proper connection to the W.H.E.N. multiroom link network when the AVH21

Uplink Terminal is connected to the

Multiroom Link Terminal  on the AVR21EN.

Expansion Hub Connection Indicator: One green LED

lights up to indicate proper connection to the W.H.E.N. multiroom link network when the AVH21

Expansion/AUX KP Terminal

is connected to the Uplink Terminal on the next sequential AVH21 Hub for zone expansion. An auxiliary zone keypad can also be connected to the

Expansion/AUX KP Terminal .

Uplink Activity Indicator: One green LED flashes at a steady

rate to indicate data transfer between the AVR21EN and AVH21(s).

Keypad Connection Indicators: Seven green LEDs light individu-

ally to indicate proper connection between an AVH21

KP Keypad

Terminal

and a KP21 AVH Hub Terminal .

Door 1 Trigger Output Indicator (Open/Close A): Tw o

green LEDs light to indicate Door 1 trigger activity. The

Lower “A”

LED

will normally be illuminated, indicating an open circuit. When the Door 1 trigger receives an OPEN command from either a KP21 keypad or KP21R remote, the relay will close for approximately 3 seconds. At the same time, the

Upper “A” LED will

light. When the relay opens, the

Upper “A” LED will turn off

and the

Lower “A” LED will light up and remain on.

Door 2 Trigger Output Indicator (Open/Close B): Tw o

green LEDs light to indicate Door 2 trigger activity. The

Lower “B”

LED

will normally be illuminated, indicating an open circuit. When the Door 2 trigger receives an OPEN command from either a KP21 keypad or KP21R remote, the relay will close for approximately 3 seconds. At the same time, the

Upper “B” LED will

illuminate. When the relay opens, the

Upper “B” LED will

turn off and the

Lower “B” LED will turn on constant.

AVH21 Top/Status-Panel Features

Mounting Screw Holes: Eight slots, four on each mounting

flange, used for attaching the WPS21 to a structured wiring panel or wall surface. These holes are punched to fit the hole patterns on Channel Vision C-0128E and Leviton 47605-28W structured wiring panels. (These specific models will each accept three hubs.)

WPS Status Panel: One adhesive lexan label fits into the

recess on a WPS21 top panel to indicate power, hub connection and keypad connections. Three different labels provide proper identification of keypad/zone configuration by hub (i.e., Hub 1, keypads/Zones 1–7; Hub 2, keypads/Zones 8–14; Hub 3, keypads/ Zones 15–20) for confirmation of connections and activity during installation and troubleshooting.

Power Indicator: One red LED lights to indicate that the

WPS21 has AC power.

Keypad Power Status Indicators: Seven green LEDs light

to indicate active

KP21 Power Terminals . The LED will turn

off if the KP terminal fuse has blown.

A/V Hub Power Status Indicators: One green LED lights to

indicate an active AVH21

A/V Hub Power Terminal . The LED

will turn off if the KP terminal fuse has blown.

KP21 Keypad Power Fuses: Seven four-amp fuses, one for

each keypad, protect the keypad power line from spikes and the WPS21 from overloading.

AVH21 A/V Hub Fuse: One four-amp fuse, protects the

AHV21 power line from spikes and the WPS21 from overloading.

WPS21 Mounting Flange: Chassis metal extensions on either

side of the WPS21 used for vertical installation to structured wiring panels or wall surfaces using mounting holes.

KP21 Power Terminals: Seven four-position plug-in terminals

connect to

Power +/– Terminals on individual KP21 keypads

to provide DC voltage to the keypads.

AVH21 A/V Hub Power Terminal: One four-position plug-in

terminal connects to

Power In on an AVH21 A/V Hub to

provide DC voltage to the A/V hub and connected KP21 keypads.

AC Power Cord Jack: Connect the AC power cord to this jack

when the installation is complete. To ensure safe operation, use only the power cord supplied with the unit. If a replacement is required, it must be of the same type and capacity.

WPS21 Front-Panel Features

Figure 8.

WPS21 Front Panel

1. KP21 Keypad Power Fuses

2. AVH21 A/V Hub Fuse

3. WPS21 Mounting Flange

4. KP21 Power Terminals

5. AVH21 A/V Hub Power Terminal

6. AC Power Cord Jack

7. Mounting Screw Holes

8. WPS Status Panel

9. Power Indicator

10. Keypad Power Status Indicators

11. A/V Hub Power Status Indicator

. 7

5 6

WPS21 Top/Status-Panel Features

POWER

4 5 6

AV HUB 1

AUDIO HUB 1

KEYPADS

Figure 9.

WPS21 Top Panel

Figure 10.

WPS21 Status-Panel Label

POWER

KEYPADS

4 5 6

AV H UB 1

AUDIO H UB 1

1. Keypad Mounting Screw Holes

2. Page/Monitor Microphone

3. Keypad/Zone/System Power On/Off Button

4. IR Sensor

5. Keypad Bezel Snap Tabs

6. Menu/Function Select Button

7. Menu/Function Select Button

8. Menu/Function Select Button

9. Menu/Function Select Button

10. Menu Page Down Button

11. Main Menu Button

12. Back Button

13. LCD Information Display

14. Volume Down Button

15. Volume Up Button

16. Menu Page Forward Button

17. Menu/Function Select Button

18. Menu/Function Select Button

19. Reset Button

20. Menu/Function Select Button

21. Menu/Function Select Button

KP21 Front-Panel Features

12341

Figure 11.

KP21 Front Panel (Without Bezel)

Main Menu Button: One backlit button allows return to the

Main Menu from any selected keypad menu page.

Back Button: One backlit button will return to the previous

page within a selected menu and then ultimately return to the Main Menu. (This is slightly different from the Menu Page Down button, which only functions within a selected multipage submenu and stops at the bottom of that menu.)

LCD Information Display: One 3-1/4" backlit LCD displays

A/V Entertainment, Paging, Monitor, Setup, Wakeup, Sleep and Door Lock menus and hard button control functions. Time, Day and zone volume are also shown. The LCD has three selectable backlight colors (that correspond to the hard button backlighting) and adjustable backlight time out.

Volume Down Button: One backlit button adjusts zone/key-

pad Volume Down when pressed.

Volume Up Button: One backlit button adjusts zone/keypad

Volume Up when pressed.

Menu Page Forward Button: One backlit button allows

selection of the next page in a menu tree. When the top level of a menu tree has been reached, the button has no function. A right-pointing arrow with a corresponding page number will appear on the LCD Information Display, just above the volume bar indicating page-forward options. If the arrow and page number are not visible, the top level of the menu tree has been reached.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various source control functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects PARTY MODE which activates all zones in the same Entertainment Group, switching them to a predetermined source at a predetermined audio level.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various source control functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects DOOR, which provides access to the Door Lock Relay screen for remote control of electronic door locks.

Reset Button: One switch clears/resets the KP21 should the

microprocessor lock up.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various sourcecontrol functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects SLEEP, which provides access to the Sleep menu, allowing multiple settings for zone and group turn-off times.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various sourcecontrol functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu this button selects WAKEUP, which provides access to the Wakeup menu, allowing multiple settings for zone and group turn-on times.

Keypad Mounting Screw Holes: Four circular openings used

to attach the keypad two a two-gang electrical box using the four included screws.

Page/Monitor Microphone: One miniature microphone

allows whole-house paging, group paging, talking between rooms and monitoring audio in a selected room via W.H.E.N. multiroom link connections.

Keypad/Zone/System Power On/Off Button: One backlit

button turns the local keypad/zone ON when the system is active in other zones. When the system is OFF, this button will activate the AVR21EN, all common-source components and the local zone. When the zone is active, the power button brightens to full illumination. If the power button is pressed when a keypad/zone is active (ON), the zone will turn off. If the local zone is the last zone active in the system, pressing the power button will turn off the local zone, the AVR21EN and all common-source components. When the zone is inactive (OFF) the power button dims to half brightness. (The power button is never fully off unless power has been removed from the keypad.)

IR Sensor: One photodiode “sees” IR commands transmitted

by a handheld IR remote control, allowing armchair zone and system control.

Keypad Bezel Snap Tabs: Two plastic tabs protrude from

either side of the KP21 and snap into slots on the back of a KP21 bezel to hold the screwless bezel in place.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various source control functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects ENTERTAIN- MENT, which opens the common and local source control menus.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various source control functions, depending upon the menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects PAGING, which opens the All, Group and Keypad Paging Menus.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various source control functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects MONI- TOR, which allows selective zone audio and/or video monitoring as allowed in the system configuration.

Menu/Function Select Button: One backlit button allows

selection of various menu options and execution of various source control functions, depending upon the Menu page and mode currently selected. In the Main Menu, this button selects SETUP, which allows configuration of various zone functions such as Turnon volume, tone controls, paging volume, multiple EQ options and backlight settings.

Menu Page Down Button: One backlit button allows selection

of the previous page in a menu tree. When the top level of a menu tree has been reached, the button has no function. A leftpointing arrow with a corresponding page number will appear on the keypad’s

LCD Information Display just above the

volume bar indicating page-down options. If the arrow and page number are not visible, the bottom level of the menu tree has been reached.

KP21 Front-Panel Features

22. IR IN Terminal

23. AVH Hub Terminal

24. Speaker Terminal

25. Keypad Address DIP Switch (Side)

26. Zone Right Channel Preamp Output

27. Zone Left Channel Preamp Output

28. Zone/Keypad Amplifier

29. Local Source Right Channel Input

30. Local Source Left Channel Input

31. Power Terminal

32. Keypad Bezel

KP21 Rear-Panel Features

+-+-

KPS

)+(R/

KPS

)+(L/)-(L

)

/)-(R

/)-(L

)+(R/)-(R

NI-XUA

)+(L/)-(L

REWOP

Figure 12.

KP21 Rear-Panel (With Bezel)

Keypad Mounting Screw Holes and Keypad Bezel

Snap Tabs.

See KP21 Front-Panel Features on pp. 26–27.

IR IN Terminal: One three-position plug-in terminal connects

to the included KP21/IR pigtail connector for connection of an external IR sensor. Provides line-of-sight control from an IR remote when the KP21 is positioned behind the user’s seating location.

AVH Hub Terminal: One RJ45 jack connects to a KP21 Keypad

Terminal

on an AVH21 A/V hub. This connection provides two-way communication between the keypad and AVH21 hub for zone/system control. It also receives digital audio data at the keypad from the AVH21 for audio from common-source components, as selected by the zone keypad or a local IR remote.

Speaker Terminal: One four-position screw terminal provides

connection to local zone speakers.

Keypad Address DIP Switch (side): One six-position DIP

switch allows configuration of a unique keypad address (zone number) for up to 20 KP21’s in a single system.

Zone Right Channel Preamp Output: One two-position screw

terminal for connection of the keypad’s right channel, line-level audio output to a local high-power amplifier, surround receiver or subwoofer.

Zone Left Channel Preamp Output: One two-position screw

terminal for connection of the keypad’s left channel, line-level audio output, to a local high-power amplifier, surround receiver or subwoofer.

Zone/Keypad Amplifier: The 50-watt-per-channel digital

amplifier provides clean, high-power audio of a selected source to connected zone speakers by reducing the distance from the amplifier to the speakers.

Local Source Right Channel Input: One two-position screw

terminal, for connection of the right channel, line-level audio output from a local source such as a DVD/CD player, MP3 player, local TV or a video game. This allows the local-source audio to be played through the KP21 amplifier and zone speakers.

Local Source Left Channel Input: One two-position screw

terminal, for connection of the left channel, line-level audio signal from a local source such as a DVD/CD player, MP3 player, local TV or a video game. This allows the local-source audio to be played through the KP21 amplifier and zone speakers.

Power Terminal: One four-position screw terminal connects a

specific KP21

Keypad Power Terminal on an associated WPS21

power hub to provide power to the KP21 keypad and amplifier.

Keypad Bezel: Snap-on cover for KP21.

KP21 Rear-Panel Features

The SPF (Source Power Flag) is used in conjunction with the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP/ON-OFF COMMAND configurations to keep common sources in sync with system ON/OFF Status. The SPF is an active device that can sense the presence of composite video or coaxial digital audio from a common-source component. When no signal is detected, the source is off and the SPF is waiting for a change of status. When a composite video or coaxial digital audio signal is detected, the SPF sends a 12V control voltage to an

AVR21EN SPF Flag-In  to let the AVR know the component

is on.

When the AVR21EN is in “Standby” and receives the power On command, one of the turn-on routines that the AVR runs through is to power up the common-source components. There is a table in the AVR’s operating system that is configured with the

REMOTE

CONTROL SETUP/ON-OFF COMMAND settings that gives the

AVR three options for turning source components On.

SPF: When a given source is set to have its On/Off status

referenced by SPF, at turn-on the AVR will “look” at the

Flag-In

Jack 

for that component to see whether the 12V control voltage is present. If not (and it shouldn’t be), the AVR will output the power command for that source through the appropriate

IR Emitter

Control Out 

. The device will turn On.

DON’T SEND: When a given source is set to DON’T SEND, the AVR

will never send power commands to that device. This device is one that either is left on all the time (cable box or satellite receiver) or is, for whatever reason, turned on and off manually.

SEND: When a given source is set to SEND, the AVR will always

send a power command when it is turned On. This is the option to use when discrete IR On/Off commands are available for a particular component.

NOTE 1: The AVR runs the same routine in reverse when the AVR

OFF command is received. If in SPF Mode, the AVR will look for 12V on a

Flag-In Jack . If 12V is present, the power command for

that device will be sent. If in DON’T SEND, no command will be sent for that device, and if a source is configured for SEND – a power command – typically an Off command will be sent.

NOTE 2: If a source has somehow turned off, and is being sensed

via SPF, if a source function command is sent from a keypad or remote (DVD play, etc.), the AVR and SPF will “see” the function command and know that the source is off and then turn the source on automatically.

SPF Features (Source Power Flag)

1. Signal Input

2. Signal Output

3. Mini Plug Pigtail

4. Red Power LED (Side)

5. Power Input

6. Power Pass-Through

Signal Input:

One RCA jack connects to the composite video or coaxial digital audio output of a common-source component. The SPF will send 12V to the Source SPF In on the AVR rear panel when composite video or coaxial digital audio is present on this input telling the AVR the source is On. The 12V is cut when the signal is removed, telling the AVR the source is Off.

Signal Output: One RCA jack connects to the composite video

or coaxial digital audio input on the AVR rear panel for the source and signal being sensed for power management.

Mini-Plug Pigtail: One 3.5mm mini plug connects to the Flag-

In Jack



for the source being sensed on the AVR rear panel. The

pigtail wire is 6 feet long.

Red Power LED: One red LED lights when the SPF is connected

to DC power.

Power Input: One 2.1mm coaxial jack connects to an

Audioaccess SPF/PS power supply.

Power Pass-Through: Allows connection of a “power bus” so

multiple SPF’s can be powered from one SPF/PS power supply. When multiple SPF’s are used, one SPF/PS gets connected to the Power Input jack on the first SPF, as shown in

Figure 6. The Power

Pass-Through connects to the Power Input jack on the next SPF using the included 2.1mm to 2.1mm coaxial plug jumper wire. Up to six SPFs can be powered from one SPF/PS.

SPF (Source Power Flag) Features

Figure 13.

SPF Source Power Flag – Top View

LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE

Figure 14.

SPF Source Power Flag – Side Views

SPF (Source Power Flag) Features

COMPOSITE VIDEO OR

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM SOURCE OUT

COMPOSITE VIDEO OR

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM SOURCE OUT

COMPOSITE VIDEO OR

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM SOURCE OUT

COMPOSITE VIDEO OR

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

TO AVR SOURCE IN

COMPOSITE VIDEO OR

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

TO AVR SOURCE IN

COMPOSITE VIDEO OR

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

TO AVR SOURCE IN

SPF/PS

POWER SUPPLY

2.1MM JUMPER WIRE

12V TO AVR SOURCE FLAG IN

2V TO AVR SOURCE FLAG IN

SPF #1

SPF #2

SPF #3

Figure 15.

SPF Power Bus and Signal Flow

Main Room Installation and Setup

CD PLAYER

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

VCR

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

LINE LEVEL IN

L R V

ANTENNA

IN OUT

CABLE/SATELLITE RECEIVER

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y Pb Pr

CABLE/SAT

IN OUT

DVD PLAYER

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y Pb Pr

RS232

IR EMITTER

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM CD PLAYER

TO AVR21EN

OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM CABLE/SAT

TO AVR21EN

COMPONENT VIDEO

FROM CABLE/SAT

TO AVR21EN

LINE-LEVEL A/V

FROM AVR21EN

TO VR

LINE-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

COMPONENT VIDEO

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

LINE-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM CD PLAYER

TO AVR21EN

LINE-LEVEL A/V

FROM VR

TO AVR21EN

PROGRAM DATA

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

DEVICE STATUS

FROM DVD CHANGER SPS

TO AVR21EN SPS IN

SPS SOURCE POWER SENSOR

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

SPS/PS

POWER SUPPLY

LINE-LEVEL A/V

FROM CABLE/SAT

TO AVR21EN

MAIN ROOM VIDEO DISPLAY

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVR21EN

TO MAIN ROOM VIDEO DISPLAY

COMPONENT VIDEO

FROM AVR21EN

TO VIDEO DISPLAY

Figure 16.

Typical Main Room Connections

1. Connect the composite video output of a DVD/CD player to the

Disc 1 C-VID In Jack  on the AVR rear panel.

2. Connect the S-Video output of a DVD/CD player to the

Disc 1

S-VID In Jack 

on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the component (Y/Pb/Pr) Outputs of a DVD/CD player to the

Disc 1 Component Video Jacks  on the AVR rear panel.

SPF (Power Management – Optional) – Disc 1

NOTE: An SPF (Source Power Flag) should be used on any device

that does not have discrete IR On/Off codes. Either composite video or coaxial digital audio can be sensed. All SPF modules can be daisychained together for power from a single SPF/PS power supply and must be powered to work. See the

SPF Features section.

Composite Video

1. Connect the composite video output of a DVD/CD player to the

Signal Input Jack on a SPF.

2. Connect the

Signal Output Jack on the SPF to the Disc 1

C-VID In Jack 

on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the 3.5mm mini plug pigtail to the

Disc 1 SPF In Jack



on the AVR rear panel.

4. If using one SPF, connect the

Power Input to an Audioaccess

SPF/PS power supply. If using multiple SPFs, connect the

Power

Input

to the Power Pass-Through on the previous SPF

using the included 2.1mm jumper wire.

Coaxial Digital Audio

1. Connect the coaxial digital output of a DVD/CD player to the

Signal Input Jack on a SPF.

2. Connect the

Signal Output Jack on the SPF to the Coaxial

1 Jack 

on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the 3.5mm

Mini plug Pigtail to the Disc 1 SPF In

Jack 

on the AVR rear panel.

4. If using one SPF, connect the power input to an Audioaccess SPF/PS power supply. If using multiple SPFs, connect the

Power

Input

to the Power Pass-Through on the previous

SPF using the included 2.1mm jumper wire.

DVD Changer Status – Disc 1

NOTE: This connection will provide disc, track and track time

information from Sony ES DVD changers. This information is displayed on KP21 keypads in multiroom applications.

Connect the RS-232 port on a Sony ES DVD changer to the

Disc 1

DVD Changer Interface Terminal 

on the AVR rear panel.

Disc 2

Same as Disc 1 above, except:

1. Use

Disc 2 connections for analog audio and video.

2. Use

Coaxial 2 for digital audio.

3. Use

Disc 2 SPF In for optional power management.

4. Use

Disc 2 DVD Changer Interface for DVD Changer 2 status.

Installing AVR21EN and Source Components

After unpacking the unit, locating it in a place with adequate ventilation, and placing it on a solid surface capable of supporting its weight, you will need to make the connections to your audio and video equipment.

IMPORTANT NOTE: For your personal safety and to avoid possible

damage to your equipment and speakers, it is always a good practice to turn off and unplug the AVR and ALL source equipment from AC outlets before making any audio or video system connections.

AVR21EN Connections

Source Connections

We recommend that you use high-quality interconnect cables when making connections to source equipment and recorders, to preserve the integrity of the audio/video signals.

NOTE 1: The analog audio video connections provided are system

defaults for source audio/video signal inputs when a source is selected.

NOTE 2: The digital audio connections provided are system

defaults for source digital audio inputs. The digital audio inputs may be reassigned in MAIN ROOM SETUP/SOURCES.

NOTE 3: The device connection recommendations shown enable

you to take advantage of the device types preprogrammed for each input on the remote control. However, if you choose to connect a different type of device, you may also “learn” the codes for most remotes into the AVR’s remote library or some buttons on the remote by following the instructions in

Remote Control Setup/Learn Code and Programming the AVR21ENR1/Learning Commands.

Disc 1

Audio – Disc 1

1. Connect the L&R line-level audio outputs of a DVD/CD player to the

Disc 1 L&R In  jacks on the AVR rear panel.

2. Connect the Coaxial Digital Out of a DVD/CD player to the

Coaxial 1  jack on the AVR rear panel.

Video – Disc 1

NOTE 1: It is not necessary to connect both composite and

S-video. It is necessary to have a composite video connection to distribute video to the AVH21 hubs in multiroom applications. The

Video Source Outputs  (multiroom video out) cannot

accept component inputs, nor are component inputs downconverted for use with these outputs.

NOTE 2: Video will default to the highest quality signal available.

NOTE 3: When a source is connected to the AVR21EN via

component video connections, it is also necessary to connect the composite and/or S-video outputs of the source device to the AVR21EN, if you wish to take advantage of the record outputs. The record outputs cannot accept component inputs, nor are component inputs down-converted for use with these outputs.

Main Room Installation and Setup

Disc 3 (DVD)

Same as Disc 1 on the previous page, except:

1. Use

Disc 3 connections for analog audio and video.

2. Use

Optical 2 for digital audio.

3. Use

Disc 3 SPF In for optional power management.

4. Use

Disc 3 DVD Changer Interface for DVD Changer 3 status.

DISC 3 (iPod)

Figure 17

iPod/aDock Connections

aDock and aDock A/V Adapter Connections

1. Connect the DB15 cable that is attached to the aDock to the aDock A/V Adapter, as shown in

Figure 17. This will provide

power and control to the iPod and send A/V signals and metadata to the AVR21EN.

2. Connect a DB9 cable from the

aDock A/V Adapter to the Disc 3

DVD Changer Interface Terminal 

on the AVR21EN rear-panel,

as shown in

Figure 17. This will provide control to the iPod and

send A/V signals and metadata to the AVR21EN.

NOTE: With the two above connections, the AVR21EN will

”autodiscover“ the iPod and automatically configure the AVR21EN, KP21 keypads and KP21R multiroom remotes with the appropriate control commands for iPod. The KP21 keypads will also automatically display the proper graphics for iPod menu navigation, control and metadata only when an iPod is inserted into the aDock. If no iPod is present, the screens will appear as a standard DVD transport control.

3. Connect the included 12VDC Power Supply to the

aDock A/V

Adapter

and plug it into an unswitched AC Outlet after all system connections have been made and confirmed. This will provide power for the A/V Adapter, the aDock and the iPod.

Audio – Disc 3 (iPod)

Connect the L&R line-level audio outputs on the aDock A/V Adapter to the

Disc 1 L&R IN Jacks  on the AVR rear panel.

Video – Disc 3 (iPod)

Connect the composite video OUT on the aDock A/V Adapter to the

Disc 1 C-Video IN on the AVR rear panel.

VR (Video Recorder)

Audio In – VR

Connect the L&R line-level audio outputs of a Video Recorder (VCR, TiVo or DVD-R) to the

VR L&R In Jacks  on the AVR

rear panel.

Audio Out – VR

Connect the VR L&R Out Jacks  on the AVR rear panel to the L&R line-level audio inputs (record) on a video recorder.

Video In – VR

NOTE 1: It is not necessary to connect both Composite and S-video.

It is necessary to have a composite video connection to distribute video to the AVH21 hubs in multiroom applications. The

Video

Source Outputs 

(multiroom video out) cannot accept component inputs, nor are component inputs down-converted for use with these outputs.

NOTE 2: Video will default to the highest quality signal available.

NOTE 3: When a source is connected to the AVR21EN via

component video connections, it is also necessary to connect the composite and/or S-video outputs of the source device to the AVR21EN if you wish to take advantage of the record outputs. The record outputs cannot accept component inputs, nor are component inputs down-converted for use with these outputs.

1. Connect the composite video output of a video recorder to the

VR C-VID In Jack  on the AVR rear panel.

2. Connect the S-video output of a DVD/CD player to the

VR S-VID

In Jack 

on the AVR rear panel.

Video Out – VR

1. Connect the VR C-VID Out Jack  on the AVR rear panel to

the composite video in (record) jack on a video recorder.

2. Connect the

VR S-VID Out Jack  on the AVR rear panel to

the S-video in (record) jack on a video recorder.

SPF (Power Management – Optional) – VR

NOTE: An SPF (Source Power Flag) should be used on any device

that does not have discrete IR on/off codes. Composite video should be sensed for a video recorder. All SPF modules can be daisy-chained together for power from a single SPF/PS power supply and must be powered to work. See the

SPF Features section.

Composite Video

1. Connect the composite video output of a video recorder to

the

Signal Input Jack on a SPF.

2. Connect the

Signal Output Jack on the SPF to the

VR C-VID IN  on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the 3.5mm

Mini Plug Pigtail to the VR SPF In 

on the AVR rear panel.

4. If using one SPF, connect the

Power Input to an Audioaccess

SPF/PS power supply. If using multiple SPFs, connect the

Power

Input

to the Power Pass-Through on the previous SPF

using the included 2.1mm jumper wire.

Main Room Installation and Setup

iPod

aDock

Power, Audio/Video

and Control

DB15 Cable from

aDock to A/V

Adapter

Composite Video From

aDock A/V Adapter to

AVR21EN Disc 3 C-Video IN

L&R Line-Level Audio

From aDock A/V Adapter to

AVR21EN Disc 3 L&R Audio IN

iPod Control In,

iPod Metadata Out,

D89 Cable from

A/V Adapter to

AVR21EN

DVD Disc Changer

Interface Disc 3

aDock A/V Adapter

AVR21EN Rear-Panel Connections

2. Connect the Signal Sense Output Jack on the SPF to the

Cable/Sat C-VID Jack on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the 3.5mm

Mini Plug Pigtail to the Cable/Sat

SPF In



on the AVR rear panel.

4. If using one SPF, connect the

Power Input to an Audioaccess

SPF/PS power supply. If using multiple SPFs, connect the

Power

Input

to the Power Pass-Through on the previous SPF

using the included 2.1mm jumper wire.

Coaxial Digital Audio

1. Connect the coaxial digital output of a cable box/satellite receiver to one of the Signal Sense

In/Out Jacks on a SPF.

2. Connect the unused Signal Sense

In/Out Jack on the SPF to

one of the

Coaxial In Jacks  on the AVR rear panel, if unused.

(If both coaxial inputs are used, use composite video sensing.)

3. Connect the 3.5mm mini plug pigtail to the

Cable/Sat SPS In



on the AVR rear panel.

4. If using one SPF, connect the

Power Input to an Audioaccess

SPF/PS power supply. If using multiple SPFs, connect the

Power

Input

to the Power Pass-Through on the previous SPF

using the included 2.1mm jumper wire.

AUX

NOTE: IR control codes need to be learned for any device connected

to these inputs/outputs in REMOTE CONTROL SETUP/AV AUX.

Audio In – AUX

1. Connect the L&R line-level audio outputs of an A/V device to the

AUX L&R In Jacks  on the AVR rear panel.

2. Connect the optical digital output of an A/V device to the

Optical 1 Jack  on the AVR rear panel.

Audio Out – AUX

1. Connect the AUX L&R Out Jacks  on the AVR rear panel to the L&R line-level audio inputs (record) on an A/V device.

2. Connect the

Optical or Coaxial Digital Out  to the optical

or coaxial digital in on an A/V device.

NOTE: These outputs only

output signals from digital audio sources. There is no upconverting analog audio signals.

Video In – AUX

NOTE 1: It is not necessary to connect both composite and S-video.

It is necessary to have a composite video connection to distribute video to the AVH21 hubs in multiroom applications. The

Video

Source Outputs



(multiroom video out) cannot accept component inputs, nor are component inputs downconverted for use with these outputs.

NOTE 2: Video will default to the highest quality signal available.

NOTE 3: When a source is connected to the AVR21EN via compo-

nent video connections, it is also necessary to connect the composite and/or S-video outputs of the source device to the AVR21EN if you wish to take advantage of the record outputs. The record outputs cannot accept component inputs, nor are component inputs downconverted for use with these outputs.

Cable/Sat

NOTE 1: Although any type of video source device can be

connected to these jacks, the remote control has the commands for the cable/sat inputs set to control a cable set-top box or a satellite receiver as configured in

MAIN MENU/REMOTE

CONTROL SETUP.

NOTE 2: When connecting a device such as a digital cable box

or other set-top tuner product with a digital audio output, we recommend that you connect both the digital and analog outputs of the product to your AVR. The audio input polling feature of the AVR will then be able to make certain that you have a constant audio feed, since it will automatically switch the audio input to the analog jacks if the digital feed is interrupted or not available for a particular channel.

Audio – Cable/Sat

1. Connect the L&R line-level audio outputs of a cable box/satellite receiver to the

Cable/Sat L&R Audio In Jacks  on the AVR

rear panel.

2. Connect a coaxial digital or optical digital out of a cable box/ satellite receiver to one of the

Coaxial or Optical Digital In

Jacks



on the AVR rear panel, if unused. (This connection will

need to be configured in the MAIN ROOM/SOURCES menu.)

Video – Cable/Sat

NOTE 1: It is not necessary to connect both composite and S-video.

It is necessary to have a composite video connection to distribute video to the AVH21 hubs in multiroom applications. The

Video

Source Outputs 

(multiroom video out) cannot accept component inputs, nor are component inputs downconverted for use with these outputs.

NOTE 2: Video will default to the highest quality signal available.

NOTE 3: When a source is connected to the AVR21EN via

1. Connect the composite video output of a cable box/satellite

receiver to the

Cable/Sat C-VID In Jack  on the AVR rear

panel.

2. Connect the S-video output of a cable box/satellite receiver to

the

Cable/Sat C-VID In Jack  on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the component (Y/Pb/Pr) outputs of a cable box/satellite

receiver to the

Cable/Sat Component Video Jacks  on the

AVR rear panel.

SPF (Power Management – Optional) – Cable/Sat

NOTE: An SPF (Source Power Flag) should be used on any device

that does not have discrete IR On/Off codes. Either composite video or coaxial digital audio can be sensed. All SPF modules can be daisy-chained together for power from a single SPF/PS power supply and must be powered to work. See the

SPF Features section.

Composite Video

1. Connect the composite video output of a cable box/satellite

receiver to one of the

Signal Input Jacks on a SPF.

Main Room Installation and Setup

ANTENNAS

Assemble the two AM loop antennas supplied with the unit so that the tabs at the bottoms of the antenna loops snap into the holes in the bases. Connect to the Tuner 1 and Tuner 2

AM and GND

Spring Terminals 

Connect the two supplied FM antennas to the Tuner 1 and Tuner

2 FM (75-Ohm) Terminals 

. The FM antenna may be an external roof antenna, an inside powered or wire-lead antenna or a connection from a cable TV system. If the antenna or connection uses 300-ohm twin-lead cable, you must use an optional 300-ohmto-75-ohm adapter to make the connection.

MONITOR OUTPUTS (MAIN ROOM VIDEO DISPLAY)

Composite/S-Video

When connecting the AVR21EN to a standard, analog video display that only has standard composite and S-video inputs, the component video inputs on the AVR21EN may not be used.

Connect the

Composite and/or S-Video Monitor Outputs  to the

matching composite and S-video inputs on your video display, depending on which types of video are output by your source devices.

Component Video

If the AVR component video inputs are used, connect the Monitor

Component Video Outputs 

to the component video inputs of

your TV, projector or other display device.

NOTE: When connecting the AVR21EN to a “digital-ready,” “HDTV-

compatible” or high-definition display (which is any device capable of accepting an input signal of 480P or higher), you are able to take advantage of the unit’s advanced video processing circuitry which converts all video signals to a 1080i output. Since the AVR21EN displays the on-screen menus with upconverted video, the connection from the AVR21EN to the display need only be one set of Y/Pr/Pb component video cables to the

Monitor Component

Video Output 

HDMI

Connect the HDMI Output  to an HDMI input on the Main Room Video Display.

NOTE: The AVR21EN configuration for using the HDMI Output

will disable the monitor component video outputs. See VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS for more information.

1. Connect the composite video output of an A/V device to the

AUX C-VID In Jack  on the AVR rear panel.

2. Connect the S-Video output of an A/V device to the

AUX S-VID

In Jack 

on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the component (Y/Pb/Pr) outputs of an A/V device to the

AUX Component Video Jacks  on the AVR rear panel.

Video Out – AUX

1. Connect the AUX C-VID Out Jack  on the AVR rear panel to the composite video in (record) jack on an A/V device.

2. Connect the

VR S-VID Out Jack  on the AVR rear panel to

the S-video in (record) jack on an A/V device.

SPF (Power Management – Optional) – AUX

NOTE: An SPF (Source Power Flag) should be used on any device

SPF Features section.

Composite Video

1. Connect the composite video output of an A/V device to one of the

Signal Input Jacks on a SPF.

2. Connect the unused

Signal Output Jack on the SPF to the

AUX C-VID In Jack  on the AVR rear panel.

3. Connect the 3.5mm

Mini Plug Pigtail to the AUX SPF In



on the AVR rear panel.

4. If using one SPF, connect the

Power Input to an Audioaccess

SPF/PS power supply. If using multiple SPFs, connect the

Power

Input

to the Power Pass-Through on the previous SPF

using the included 2.1mm jumper wire.

Game/CAM

1. If you have a camcorder, video game or other audio/video device that is connected to the AVR on a temporary, rather than permanent, basis, connect the audio, video and digital audio outputs of that device to the front-panel inputs. The

Game/Cam

line-level Audio M

and Game/Cam Composite and S-Video

Inputs JL

can be configured for In/Out in the MAIN MENU/

SOURCES setup. The default is In (green LED

Game/Cam

Input/Output Status Indicator K

; red LED indicates the jacks

have been configured as outputs).

2. The default digital input for Game/Cam is

Optical 3 In C. The

digital coaxial input,

Coaxial 3 F can be configured for In/Out

in the MAIN MENU/SOURCES setup. The default is In (green LED

Digital Input 3 Coaxial Input/Output Status Indicator G;

red LED indicates the jack has been configured as an output). See the

Main Room Operation/Front Panel Connections

section for more information on input configuration. A device connected here is selected as the Game/Cam input on the remote control.

8-Channel DVD Audio

If an external multichannel audio source with 5.1 outputs such as an external digital processor/ decoder, DVD-Audio or SACD player is used, connect the outputs of that device to the

8-Channel DVD Audio

Inputs 

. Depending on the source device in use, all eight jacks may be used, though in many cases only connections to the front left/right, center, surround left/right and LFE (subwoofer input) jacks will be used for standard 5.1 audio signals. Connect as appropriate.

Main Room Installation and Setup

AVR21EN Speaker Connections

POWERED SUBWOOFER

FRONT LEFT

CENTER CHANNEL

RIGHT FRONT

SIDE SURROUND

LEFT

AVR21 REAR PANEL SIDE SURROUND

RIGHT

BACK SURROUND

LEFT

BACK SURROUND

RIGHT

+ –

+ – + –

+ –+ –

14 AWG

2-CONDUCTOR STRANDED

SPEAKER WIRE

SHIELDED

AUDIO CABLE

14 AWG

2-CONDUCTOR STRANDED

SPEAKER WIRE

14 AWG

2-CONDUCTOR STRANDED

SPEAKER WIRE

SUB/LFE

LINE IN

PREAMP

SUB OUT

Figure 18.

AVR21EN Speaker Connections

AVR21EN Input/Output Connections

1. Connect the Front, Center, Surround and Surround Back

Speaker Outputs 

to their respective speakers, using

quality 14AWG two-conductor stranded speaker wire.

NOTE 1: 16AWG wire may be used for short runs of less than

10 feet. We do not recommend that you use cables with an AWG equivalent of 18 or higher (smaller gauge), due to the power loss and degradation in performance that will occur.

NOTE 2: When connecting wires to the speakers, be certain to

observe proper polarity. Note that the positive (+) terminal of each speaker connection on the AVR now carries a specific color code, as noted in the

AVR21EN Rear-Panel Features section. However,

most speakers still use a red terminal for the positive connection. Connect the “negative” (or black) wire to the same terminal on both the receiver and the speaker.

NOTE 3: While most speaker manufacturers adhere to an industry

convention of using black terminals for negative and red ones for positive, some may vary from this configuration. To ensure proper phase and optimal performance, consult the identification plate on your speaker or the speaker’s manual to verify polarity. If you do not know the polarity of your speaker, consult the speaker’s manufacturer.

To ensure that all the audio signals are carried to your speakers without loss of clarity or resolution, we suggest that you use highquality speaker cable. Many brands of cable are available and the choice of cable may be influenced by the distance between your speakers and the receiver, the type of speakers you use, personal preferences and other factors.

Cables that are run inside walls should have the appropriate markings to indicate listing with UL, CSA or other appropriate testing agency standards.

We also recommend that the length of cable used to connect speaker pairs be identical. For example, use the same length of cable to connect the front-left and front-right or surround-left and surround- right speakers, even if the speakers are a different distance from the AVR21EN.

Subwoofer

Connections to a subwoofer are normally made via a line-level audio connection from the

Subwoofer Output  to the line-level

input of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. When a passive subwoofer is used, the connection first goes to a power amplifier, which will be connected to one or more subwoofer speakers. If you are using a powered subwoofer that does not have linelevel input connections, follow the instructions furnished with the speaker for connection information.

Pre-Out

The AVR21EN provides an 8-channel preamp output section,

Preamp Outputs  that can be used with high-powered

amplifiers in the Main Room, if desired. Connect the preamp output channels to the appropriate amplifier inputs. The Main Room audio will still be controlled with the AVR21ENR1 remote.

Control Out (Source IR)

Each of the AVR21EN IR emitter outputs is a dedicated output allowing control of multiple same-brand, same-model components (multiple DVD/CD players, satellite receivers, etc.).

1. Attach an IR emitter (Audioaccess IREMIT1) to the faceplate of the device to be controlled.

2. Carefully run the emitter wire back to the AVR21EN rear panel and connect it to the appropriate

Control Out  device jack.

Front Door Mic/Camera Interface (Available Fall 2007)

1. The W.H.E.N. System is designed to integrate with Panasonic

door phone and Panasonic-compatible front door stations such as those from Channel Vision.

2. Connect the audio from the Main Room (home theater) KP21 to the KP A/V audio input.

3. Connect the composite video output from the AVH21 that corresponds to the Main Room KP21 to the KP A/V video input.

Remote

If the AVR21EN is placed behind a solid or smoked glass cabinet door, the obstruction may prevent the IR sensor on the AVR from receiving commands. In this event, an optional remote sensor or IR repeater system may be used. Connect the IR output of the remote sensor or IR repeater system to the

Remote In Jack .

The common-source components connected to the AVR21EN inputs are all controlled via the

Control Out  IR outputs. These

components will also be controlled with the IR commands from the remote sensor or repeater system.

RS-232

The RS-232 port is currently used for factory testing and software updates. No connection is required.

Multiroom Link

The multiroom link connects the AVR21EN to the AVH21 A/V hubs in multiroom applications. Connect a Cat. 5e cable terminated with RJ45 connectors from the

Uplink Terminal on an AVH21 to the

Multiroom Link Terminal  on the AVR. These ports can also be

used in smaller systems to add two additional audio zones to the AVR, by connecting one KP21 keypad directly to each of these ports. The multiroom link will communicate system control and distribute digital audio to the individual keypads. See the

Multiroom Installation & Setup/Three Zone System section

for additional information.

Keypad DIP Switch Settings Address

12 3 4 5 6

1DNUPUPUPUPUP

2UPDNUPUPUPUP

3DNDNUPUPUPUP

4UPUPDNUPUPUP

5DNUPDNUPUPUP

6UPDNDNUPUPUP

7DNDNDNUPUPUP

8UPUPUPDNUPUP

9DNUPUPDNUPUP

10 UP DN UP DN UP UP

11 DN DN UP DN UP UP

12 UP UP DN DN UP UP

13 DN UP DN DN UP UP

14 UP DN DN DN UP UP

15 DN DN DN DN UP UP

16 UP UP UP UP DN UP

17 DN UP UP UP DN UP

18 UP DN UP UP DN UP

19 DN DN UP UP DN UP

20 UP UP DN UP DN UP

Figure 19.

KP21 Address DIP Switch Settings

Installing W.H.E.N. System Components

W.H.E.N. allows unprecedented flexibility in system design for incorporating whole-house A/V distribution and control, and home theater.

For the purpose of detailing the options, the Multizone sections will be broken down into three groups: Main Room, Three-Zone System and Hub System. There are critical differences in system components and connections with these different options, so each will be detailed separately.

Main Room

The Home Theater (AVR21EN) and common-source components used by the Home Theater and Remote Rooms.

Three-Zone System

A system that includes the Main Room and two audio-only zones controlled with KP21 keypads connected directly to the AVR21EN.

Hub System

A system that includes the Main Room and any number (up to 20) of additional zones, controlled with KP21 keypads connected to AVH21 audio/video hubs and WPS21 power supply hubs. (The maximum number of AVH21 and WPS21 hub sets is three.)

KP21 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

KP21 Mounting

The KP21s should be mounted in proper two-gang J-boxes. Carlon, BH235A (new work, closed box), BH234R (old work-retrofit, closed box), SC200A (new work, open frame) and SCS200RR (old workretrofit, open frame) are the only approved options.

NOTE: A KP21 SHOULD NEVER BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ELEC-

TRICAL BOX WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE (AC) DEVICES SUCH AS LIGHT SWITCHES AND DIMMERS. This will negatively affect system performance and is a violation of electrical code in most areas.

Keypad Address (Zone Number) Settings

Before making any connections to a KP21 Keypad, it must be configured for its unique keypad address (zone number). This address tells the system which button in which zone is initiating a specific command or function. The network address is set using the sixposition

DIP Switch on the side of the KP21. There are

20 address configurations. They can be set using the table in

Figure 19.

NOTE:

No two keypads can share the same address.

Multiroom Installation and Setup

(Zone Number)

Multiroom Installation and Setup

+ +

KPS

(

)

(

)

-(L

)

OER

)

(L/)

(

) +(R/)-(

N I

-XUA

) +(L/)-(L

REWOP

KPS

(

)

(

)

-(L

)

(R/)-(R

OER

)+(L/)

(

)+ (R /

)

-(R

N I

-XUA

)+ (L /)(L

REWOP

CD PLAYER

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

VCR

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

LINE LEVEL IN

L R V

ANTENNA

IN OUT

CABLE/SATELLITE RECEIVER

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y Pb Pr

CABLE/SAT

IN OUT

DVD PLAYER

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

L R

LINE LEVEL OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y Pb Pr

5.75.75.7

5.7

Figure 20.

Typical Three-Room Setup

LINE-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

COMPONENT VIDEO

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

LINE-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM CD PLAYER

TO AVR21EN

DEVICE STATUS

FROM DVD CHANGER SPS

TO AVR21EN SPF IN

LINE-LEVEL A/V

FROM VR

TO AVR21EN

LINE-LEVEL A/V FROM AVR21EN

TO VR

LINE-LEVEL A/V

FROM CABLE/SAT

TO AVR21EN

PROGRAM DATA

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

IR EMITTER

DVD CHANGER

RS232

CD PLAYER

CAB/SAT

COMPONENT VIDEO

FROM CABLE/SAT

TO AVR21EN

SPF (SOURCE POWER FLAG)

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

POWER SUPPLY

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM DVD CHANGER

TO AVR21EN

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM CD PLAYER

TO AVR21EN

SPF/PS

AVR21EN

WPS21

KP21 KP21

24VDC

FROM WPS21

TO KP21

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVR21EN MULTIROOM LINK

FROM WPS21

OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO

FROM CABLE/SAT

TO AVR21EN

TO KEYPADS

24VDC

TO KP21

SPEAKER-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM KP21

TO ZONE SPEAKERS

SPEAKER-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM KP21

TO ZONE SPEAKERS

Three-Zone System

Main Room

The AVR21EN and all common-source components and speakers should be installed, connected and set up as described in the

Pre-Wire/Main Room, and Main Room Installation and Setup

sections.

Remote Rooms Keypads

In addition, a Cat. 5e should be pulled from the KP21 keypad location in each remote zone (up to two) to the AVR21EN for control, audio and data. Be sure to leave enough “play” in the Cat. 5e on both ends to be able to easily make connections and move components, should they require service.

The KP21s should be mounted in proper two-gang J-boxes. Carlon, BH235A (new work, closed box), BH234R (old work-retrofit, closed box), SC200A (new work, open frame).

NOTE: A KP21 SHOULD

NEVER BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ELECTRICAL BOX WITH HIGHVOLTAGE (AC) DEVICES SUCH AS LIGHT SWITCHES AND DIMMERS. This will negatively affect system performance and is a violation of electrical code in most areas.

It is recommended that the Cat. 5e be pulled through an area that can be used at a later date to install AVH21 and WPS21 hubs, should the homeowner decide to expand system flexibility with additional zones.

Speakers

The KP21s feature built-in 50-watts-per-channel digital amplifiers, so speaker wire need only be run locally (within the zone) from each speaker location to the KP21 location within each zone. Be sure to leave some “play” in the speaker wires on both ends to be able to easily make connections and remove in-wall components, should they require service.

See the

Zone Connections/KP21 Connections and Zone Setup

Sections to complete installation and setup of the Remote Rooms.

NOTE: There are additional, individual-zone preferences that can

be set, as described in

System Operation/Multiroom.

Three-Zone System

Multiroom Installation and Setup

+-+-

+ +

KPS

)

(R/

)

-(R

)

+(L

)

(

)

(

)

L/)

) +

(R /)-(

XUA

)+( L/)

( L

RE WO P

+-+-

+ +

KPS

)

(R/

)

-(R

)

+(L

)

(

)

(

)

L/)

) +

(R /)-(

XUA

)+( L/)

( L

RE WO P

+-+-

+ +

KPS

)

(R/

)

-(R

)

+(L

)

(

)

(

)

L/)

) +

(R /)-(

XUA

)+( L/)

( L

RE WO P

WPS21

AVH21

AVR21EN

KP21

ZONE SPEAKERS

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA FROM AVR1EN MULTIROOM LINK

TO AVH21 UPLINK

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVR21EN VIDEO SOURCE OUT

TO AVH21 SOURCE IN

24V DC

FROM WPS21

TO AVH21

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVH21

TO KEYPADS

SPEAKER-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM KP21

TO ZONE SPEAKERS

24V DC

FROM WPS21

TO KEYPADS

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVH21

TO ZONE VIDEO DISPLAYS

VIDEO DISPLAY

Figure 21.

Typical Hub System

P O WER

123

K E Y P ADS

4 5 6

AV HUB 1

UDIO HUB 1

1. Shelf Mount. The hubs can lay flat on a shelf, when appropriate

in a given installation. Though the hubs typically run cool, adequate space should always be provided for airflow. Never place any object on top of a hub when shelf mounted. Utilize the space created by the mounting flange for running wires underneath the hubs when appropriate.

2. Wall Mount. The hubs can be mounted on an equipment

cabinet or wall surface. Drill small starter holes, using the hub mounting screw holes for alignment. Sink mounting screws into wall studs when possible or mount a sheet of plywood slightly larger than the area required for the hubs to the wall surface to ensure firm attachment. Leave several inches vertically between hubs for pulling wires and making connections. Utilize the space created by the mounting flange for running wires underneath the hubs when appropriate.

3. Panel Mount. The mounting screw holes on the AVH21 and

WPS21 hub flanges are configured for use with two brands of popular structured wiring panels: the Channel Vision C-0128E and Leviton Cat: 47605-28W. (These specific models will each accept three hubs.) Hubs can mount to either hole pattern, using standard nuts and bolts or the supplied locking pins.

Hub System

Main Room

The AVR21EN and all common-source components and speakers should be installed, connected and set up as described in the

Pre-Wire/Main Room, and Main Room Installation and Setup

sections.

Hub Installation

In hub systems, the AVH21 A/V hubs and WPS power supply hubs are always used in pairs (one each – AVH21 and WPS21). The recommended positioning for these pairs is side by side. When using one pair of hubs, this positioning is not necessarily critical; however, when using multiple sets, wire management and connections between hubs will be much neater and easier by positioning the hubs side by side.

The AVH21 A/V hubs and WPS power supply hubs can be mounted in three ways.

Hub System

Figure 22.

Hub Panel Mount

P O WER

123

4 5 6

AV HUB 1

A UDIO HUB 1

K E Y P ADS

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

AVH21 #1 ZONES 1–7

AVH21 #2 ZONES 8–14

AVH21 #3 ZONES 15–20

WPS21 #1

ZONES 1–7

WPS21 #2

ZONES 8–14

WPS21 #3

ZONES 15–20

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

K E Y P ADS

P O WER

123

4 5 6

K E Y P ADS

P O WER

123

4 5 6

AV HUB 1 A UDIO HUB 1

Head End Connections

AVH21 Connections

Power In

1. Using 14-16AWG four-conductor stranded wire, strip approximately 1/4" and twist the ends until there are no loose strands that can cause shorts.

2. Insert the twisted ends into the appropriate + and – slots on the included plug-in connectors and tighten with a small-blade screwdriver. Pull the wire slightly to confirm connection. Check polarity on both ends.

3. Connect the plug-in connectors to the

Power In Terminal on

the AVH21 and to the

AV/Audio Hub 1/2/3 Terminal on

the WPS21 to power the AVH21 and associated KP21 keypads, as shown in

Figure 21 on page 42.

4. In larger systems using multiple hubs, repeat Steps 1–3 above for each AVH21/WPS21 pair. Be sure to be consistent in matching the appropriate AVH and WPS pairs and associated KP21s (

Figure 24).

DO NOT connect more than one AVH21 to a single WPS21.

AVH21 Configuration

Whether using one AVH21 or three, the hubs need to be configured for “Hub Number” and “Zone Group” identification. (This is not the same as the Entertainment, Wake-Up and Sleep Groups that are configured in the ZONE SETUP menu.) This allows the system management software to keep track of which zones are doing what. The

Hub Configuration Switch on the

AVH21 top panel identifies each hub and its zone group.

AVH21 Hub Configuration Switch

The settings of the Hub Configuration Switch correspond to the “keyed” openings in the three lexan status-panel labels included with each AVH21. When the switches have been set, match the appropriate label, remove the adhesive backing and carefully place the label in the recess on the AVH21 Top Panel. The settings for the

Hub Configuration Switch are:

Multiroom Installation and Setup

Figure 23.

AVH Hub Configuration Switch Settings

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

AVH21 #1 ZONE S 1–7

AVH21 #2 ZO NES 8–14

AVH21 #3 ZONES 15–20

WPS21 #1

ZONES 1–7

WPS21 #2

ZO NES 8–14

WPS21 #3

ZONES 15–20

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

24V DC

FROM WPS21 #3

AV/AUDIO HUB 1/2/3

TO AVH21 #3

POWER-IN

24V DC

FROM WPS21 #2

AV/AUDIO HUB 1/2/3

TO AVH21 #2

POWER-IN

24V DC

FROM WPS21 #1

AV/AUDIO HUB 1/2/3

TO AVH21 #1

POWER-IN

24V DC

FROM WPS21 #1

KP 1–7

TO KP21’s POWER-IN

ZONES 1–7

24V DC

FROM WPS21 #2

KP 8–14

TO KP21’s POWER-IN

ZONES 8–14

24V DC

FROM WPS21 #3

KP 14–20

TO KP21’s POWER-IN

ZONES 14–20

Figure 24.

Multiple Hub Power Connections

POSITION 1 HUB 1 ZONES 1–7

POSITION 2 HUB 2 ZONES 8–14

POSITION 3 HUB 3 ZONES 15–20

P O WER

K E Y P ADS

AV HUB 1

A UDIO HUB 1

123

4 5 6

K E Y P ADS

AV HUB 1

A UDIO HUB 1

123

4 5 6

K E Y P ADS

AV HUB 1

A UDIO HUB 1

123

4 5 6

Uplink/Multiroom Link

1. Using Cat. 5e cable, properly terminated with RJ45 connectors, connect the

Multiroom Link Terminal  on the AVR21EN to

the

Uplink Terminal on the AVH21, as shown in Figure 25.

2. In larger systems using multiple hubs, complete Step 1 above by connecting the

Multiroom Link Terminal  on the AVR21EN to

the

Uplink Terminal on AVH21 #1 as shown in Figure 25.

a) Using Cat. 5e cable, properly terminated with RJ45 connectors,

connect the

Expansion/AUX KP Terminal on AVH21 #1

to the

Uplink Terminal on AVH21 #2, as shown in

Figure 25.

b) If using three hubs, connect the Expansion/AUX KP

Terminal

on AVH21 #2 to the Uplink Terminal on

AVH21 #3, as shown in

Figure 25.

Keypad Connections

1. Using Cat. 5e cable properly terminated with RJ45 connectors, connect the cables to the appropriate KP21 keypad terminals,

KP 1-7 on the AVH21. As shown in Figure 26. Confirm

proper connection by zone (Keypad number). Improper connection of the wrong keypad to the wrong terminal will cause operational errors.

2. In larger systems using multiple hubs, repeat Step 1 for all keypad connections to AVH21 #s 1, 2 and 3. Confirm all connections by zone (keypad number) as shown in

Figure 26.

a) AVH21 #1 connects to keypads for zones 1–7

b) AVH21 #2 connects to keypads for zones 8–14

c) AVH21 #3 connects to keypads for zones 15–20.

Hub System

AVH21 #1 ZONES 1–7

AVH21 #2 ZONES 8–14

AVH21 #3 ZONES 15–20

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVR21EN MULTIROOM LINK

TO AVH21 #1 UPLINK

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVH21 #1

EXPANSION/AUX KEYPAD

TO AVH21 #2 UPLINK

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVH21 #2

EXPANSION/AUX KEYPAD

TO AVH21 #3 UPLINK

AVR21EN

REAR PANEL

AVH21 #1 ZONES 1–7

AVH21 #2 ZONES 8–14

AVH21 #3 ZONES 15–20

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVH21 #2 KP 8–14

TO KP21 KEYPADS 8–14

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVH21 #3 KP 15–20

TO KP21 KEYPADS 15–20

CONTROL, DIGITAL AUDIO, DATA

FROM AVH21 #1 KP 1-7

TO KP21 KEYPADS 1-7

Figure 25.

Uplink Connections

Figure 26.

AVH21 Keypad Connections

AVH21 #3 ZONES 15–20

AVH21 #2 ZONES 8–14

AVH21 #1 ZONES 1–7

AVR21EN REAR PANEL

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVH21 #2 VIDEO OUTPUT BYPASS

TO AVH21 #3 VIDEO INPUTS

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVH21 #1 VIDEO OUTPUT BYPASS

TO AVH21 #2 VIDEO INPUTS

VIDEO MONITOR & SECURITY CAMERAS

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM CAMERAS

TO AVH21 #1

CAM 1–

7 INPUTS

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVR21EN VIDEO SOURCE OUT

TO AVH21 #1 SOURCE VIDEO INPUT

FROM SECURITY CAMERAS

FROM AVR21EN

Source Video In

1. Using RG6 quad shield coaxial cable terminated with male F connectors, connect each of the

Video Source Out Terminals  on

the AVR21EN rear panel to the appropriate

Source Video Input

on the AVH21, as shown in Figure 27.

2. In larger systems, complete Step 1 above by connecting the

Video Source Outs  on the AVR21EN to the appropriate Source Video Input on AVH21 #1, as shown in Figure 27.

a) Using short lengths of RG6 coax, connect each of the Source

Video Output Bypass Terminals

on AVH21 #1 to the

appropriate

Source Video Input on AVH21 #2, as shown

Figure 27.

b) If using three hubs, connect each of the Source Video Output

Bypass Terminals

on AVH21 #2 to the appropriate

Source Video Input on AVH21 #3, as shown in Figure 27.

Camera Video In

1. Using RG6 quad shield coaxial cable terminated with male F connectors, connect each zone video monitor or security camera composite video output to the appropriate

Camera Video Input

on the AVH21. Terminate the camera ends of the coax as

appropriate.

2. In larger systems, complete Step 1 above by connecting zone video monitor or security camera composite video output to the appropriate

Camera Video Input on AVH21 #1, as

shown in

Figure 27. Terminate the camera ends of the coax

as appropriate.

a) Using short lengths of RG6 coax, connect each of the

Camera

Video Output Bypass Terminals

on AVH21 #1 to the

appropriate

Camera Video Input on AVH21 #2, as

shown in

Figure 27.

b) If using three Hubs, connect each of the Camera Video

Output Bypass Terminals

on AVH21 #2 to the

appropriate

Camera Video Inputs on AVH21 #3, as

shown in

Figure 27.

Multiroom Installation and Setup

Figure 27.

Source and Camera Video Input Connections

Zone (KP) Video Out

1. Using RG6 quad shield coaxial cable terminated with male F connectors, connect the appropriate

KP Video Output 1–6

Terminal

on the AVH21, as shown in Figure 28, to the

appropriate Zone 1–6 video display composite video input.

NOTE: The AVH21 only has video outputs for Zones 1–6.

Confirm proper connection by zone (keypad number). Improper connection will cause operational errors such as misrouted video signals.

2. In larger systems using multiple hubs, repeat Step 1 for all

Video Output

connections to AVH21 #s 1, 2 and 3 for all zones configured for video. Confirm all connections by zone (keypad number), as shown in

Figure 28.

a) AVH21 #1 connects to video displays in Zones 1–6

b) AVH21 #2 connects to video displays in Zones 8–13

c) AVH21 #3 connects to video displays in Zones 15–20

NOTE: Each AVH21 only has six zone video outputs. It is

recommended that audio-only zones such as common areas like hallways and patios be connected to Zones 7 and 14.

Hub System

AVH21 #1 ZONES 1–7

AVH21 #2 ZONES 8–14

AVH21 #3 ZONES 15–20

STRUCTURED WIRING PANEL

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVH21 #2

KP 8–13 VIDEO OUTPUTS

TO ZONE 8–13 VIDEO DISPLAYS

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVH21 #3

KP 15–20 VIDEO OUTPUTS

TO ZONE 15–20 VIDEO DISPLAYS

COMPOSITE VIDEO

FROM AVH21 #1

KP 1–6 VIDEO OUTPUTS

TO ZONE 1–6 VIDEO DISPLAYS

TO ZONE VIDEO DISPLAY

Figure 28.

AVH21 Zone Video Output Connections

3. Connect the plug-in connector to the appropriate Door 2

Terminal

on the AVH21 and connect and terminate the

door-lock end, as appropriate.

4. If using the

+/– Terminal , set the 12V/24V Switch to

the proper position.

5. In larger systems using multiple AVH21s, the Door 2 terminals can be used to activate different door locks in different areas. The various Doors will appear in the KP21 Keypad Main Menu under DOOR. If only one AVH21 is used, two doors will appear in the menu; if two AVH21s are used, there will be four doors available; and if using three AVH21s, there will be six doors in the Menu.

a. AVH21 #1 controls Doors 1 & 2 (1=1; 2=2)

b. AVH21 #2 controls Doors 3 & 4 (1=3; 2=4)

c. AVH21 #3 controls Doors 5 & 6 (1=5; 2=6)

WPS21 Connections

AVH21 Power Connections

See the AVH21 Connections/Power In section.

AC Input

Connect the supplied power cord and plug it into an unswitched 120V AC outlet after all system connections have been made and confirmed. Use the supplied cord or contact Audioaccess for information on how to acquire a proper replacement.

ZONE Connections

KP21 Connections

Control, Digital Audio, Data (Three-Zone System)

This connection provides local zone, common-source and system control and feeds the KP21 amplifier with digital audio for the currently selected source. If using Sony

ES DVD Changers, this connection will also provide disc and track information that will be visible on the keypad display when that source is selected.

Using a Cat. 5e cable properly terminated with an RJ45 connector, connect the cable from one of the

Multiroom Link Terminals 

on the AVR21EN, to the AVH21 Hub Terminal on the KP21 rear panel, as shown in

Figure 29.

Control, Digital Audio, Data (Hub System)

Using a Cat. 5e cable properly terminated with an RJ45 connector, connect the cable from the appropriate AVH21

A/V Hub KP

Terminal

to the AVH21 Hub Terminal on the KP21 rear

panel, as shown in

Figure 29.

Door 1

The Door 1 cluster features two latching relays. The Dry-Contact

Terminal

would typically be used with a door-lock mechanism that provides voltage for activation by a remote switch. The

+/– Terminal would typically be used with a door-lock

mechanism that requires external voltage to activate. The

+/–

Terminal

has a selectable output voltage of 12V or 24V DC.

1. Using 24AWG two-conductor stranded wire, strip approximately

1/4" and twist the ends until there are no loose strands that can cause shorts.

2. Insert the twisted ends into the appropriate slots on the included

plug-in connectors and tighten with a small-blade screwdriver. Pull the wire slightly to confirm connection. Check polarity on both ends.

NOTE: Polarity on the AVH21 Dry-Contact Terminal

end is not critical. The polarity of the Door 1 +/– Terminal must be correct or the door-lock device will not function properly and may be damaged.

3. Connect the plug-in connector to the appropriate

Door 1

Terminal

on the AVH21 and connect and terminate the

door-lock end as appropriate.

NOTE: Door 1 relays should not

be paralleled with Door 2 relays.

4. If using the

+/– Terminal , set the 12V/24V Switch to

the proper position.

5. In larger systems using multiple AVH21s, the Door 1 terminals can be used to activate different door locks in different areas. The various doors will appear in the KP21 Keypad Main Menu under DOOR. If only one AVH21 is used, two doors will appear in the menu; if two AVH21s are used, there will be four doors available; and if using three AVH21s, there will be six doors in the menu.

a) AVH21 #1 controls Doors 1 & 2 (1=1; 2=2)

b) AVH21 #2 controls Doors 3 & 4 (1=3; 2=4)

c) AVH21 #3 controls Doors 5 & 6 (1=5; 2=6)

Door 2

The Door 2 cluster features two latching relays. The Dry-Contact

Terminal

would typically be used with a door-lock mechanism that provides voltage for activation by a remote switch. The

+/– Terminal would typically be used with a door-lock

mechanism that requires external voltage to activate. The

+/–

Terminal

has a selectable output voltage of 12V or 24V DC.

1. Using 24AWG two-conductor stranded wire, strip approximately

1/4" and twist the ends until there are no loose strands that can cause shorts.

2. Insert the twisted ends into the appropriate slots on the included

plug-in connectors and tighten with a small-blade screwdriver. Pull the wire slightly to confirm connection. Check polarity on both ends.

NOTE: Polarity on the AVH21 Dry-Contact Terminal

end is not critical. The polarity of the Door 1 +/– Terminal must be correct or the door-lock device will not function properly and may be damaged.

Multiroom Installation and Setup

AUX In (Local Source In)

This connection allows the audio from a local source such as a CD/DVD player, DVR, cable/satellite receiver or Video Game to be played through the KP21 amplifier and local room speakers.

1. Using shielded stereo audio cable, strip approximately 1/4" and twist the ends until there are no loose strands that can cause shorts.

2. Insert the twisted ends into the appropriate slots on the

R+/R–

and L+/L– AUX-In Terminals on the KP21 rear panel, as shown in

Figure 29, and tighten with a small-blade screwdriver.

Pull the wire slightly to confirm connection.

3. Terminate local-source ends as appropriate, typically male RCA plugs. Confirm polarity.

4. Connect to local-source Left and Right line-level audio outputs, as shown in

Figure 29.

Pre-Out (Keypad to Local High-Power Amplifier or Powered Subwoofer)

This connection allows the KP21 keypad to output variable linelevel audio to a local device such as a high-power audio amplifier or powered subwoofer. The KP21’s 50-watts-per-channel digital amplifier will provide quality high-level audio output that will satisfy most applications. In some situations, such as very large rooms or outdoor zones, an external high-power amplifier may be desirable. In other situations, it may be desirable to add a powered subwoofer to enhance low-frequency audio performance.

NOTE 1: The Pre-Out is variable, so local audio will still be

controlled via the KP21 or KP21R remote volume controls.

NOTE 2: The KP21 speaker out and pre-out can be used simul-

taneously. Both are variable outs and controlled via the KP21 or KP21R remote.

NOTE 3: There are other applications such as connecting to a line-

level audio input on a local TV when external speakers are not used in a particular zone. (Set TV volume to a good level and control the audio level with the KP21 or KP21R remote volume controls.)

1. Using shielded stereo audio cable, strip approximately 1/4" and twist the ends until there are no loose strands that can cause shorts.

2. Insert the twisted ends into the appropriate slots on the

R+/R–

and L+/L– Pre-Out Terminals on the KP21 rear panel, as shown in

Figure 30, and tighten with a small-blade screwdriver.

Pull the wire slightly to confirm connection.

3. Terminate amplifier ends as appropriate, typically male RCA plugs. Confirm polarity.

4. Connect to the amplifier’s Left and Right line-level audio inputs, as shown in

Figure 30.

Zone Connections

Figure 30.

KP21 Pre-Out Connections

Figure 29.

KP21 AUX-In Connections

KP21 LOCALSOURCE

CABLE/SATELLITE RECEIVER

(

)

(R + )

)

KPS

(L/ + )

R (

ERP

)/ R

+ +

)

TUO

L (

ERP

)

L/ ( + )

R E

WOP

) +(L

-(L

NIXU A

)

+(R/)

-(R

AUX-IN

LEFT CHANNEL

AUX-IN

RIGHT CHANNEL

LINE LEVEL OUT

L R

SHIELDED STEREO

AUDIO CABLE

LINE-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM LOCAL SOURCE

S VIDEO

OUT

TO KP21 AUX-IN

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y Pb Pr

CABLE/SAT

IN OUT

HIGH POWER AMPLIFIER

AUDIO AMPLIFIER

LINE L E VEL

AUDIO IN

L R

LINE-LEVEL AUDIO

FROM KP21 PRE-OUT

TO AMPLIFIER LINE-IN

SPEAKER

OUTPU T S

L R

ZONE SPEAKERS

SHIELDED STEREO AUDIO CABLE

PRE-OUT

RIGHT CHANNEL

PRE-OUT

LEFT CHANNEL

KP21

R ( )-

/ R

( + )

L (

L/)-

( )+

R ( )-

OERP

(R/ +

)

L ( )-

L/ (

REW

) + (L/

)(L

XUA

)+(R/

)( R

Connecting an External IR Sensor

In some installations, the keypad will not be mounted on the same wall as the speakers and video display, the focal point of the room. In fact, the keypad may be mounted behind the seating area, making use of the KP21R remote control a bit awkward. In these situations, an external IR sensor can be connected to the keypad and mounted in a more convenient location, allowing normal “line of sight” use of the remote.

There is a wide variety of IR products to choose from. Most standard 12V IR sensors will work with the KP21 and KP21R.

NOTE: Always avoid mounting IR sensors in locations exposed

to bright electrical lighting or sunlight. Exposure to light sources can interfere with the IR sensor’s being able to “see” the IR commands from the remote control. Also try to avoid mounting an IR sensor near light dimmers, as some dimmers radiate sufficient amounts of RF (radio frequency) noise to interfere with the sensor. NEVER INSTALL AN IR SENSOR IN THE SAME ELECTRICAL BOX AS HIGH-VOLTAGE DEVICES SUCH AS LIGHT SWITCHES, AS THIS CAN HAVE AN ADVERSE EFFECT ON SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND IS A VIOLATION OF ELECTRICAL CODE IN MOST PLACES. To connect an external IR sensor:

1. Using 24AWG three-conductor stranded, non-shielded wire, connect the +12V, Ground and IR-Out terminals on the IR sensor to the

KP21/IR Pigtail Connector using wire nuts or

a terminal strip. Check polarity. Red: +12VDC; white: IR signal; black: ground.

2. CAREFULLY connect the

KP21/IR Pigtail Connector to the

IR-In Terminal on the back of the KP21. Be careful to

not damage the three connection pins in the IR IN Terminal.

TV/Video Display

1. Terminate the RG6 coaxial cable connected to the proper AVH21-zone

KP Video Output using the correct termination

for the TV/video display input. (Most composite video input jacks are RCA-type connectors.)

2. Connect the RG6 to the composite video input on the local-zone video display. Confirm proper AVH21-zone

KP Video Output

connection.

Speakers

1. Using 16AWG two-conductor stranded wire, strip approximately 1/4" and twist the ends until there are no loose strands that can cause shorts.

2. Insert the twisted ends into the appropriate slots on the

R+/R–

and L+/L– Speaker (SPK) Terminals on the KP21 rear panel, as shown in

Figure 31, and tighten with a small-blade

screwdriver. Pull the wire slightly to confirm connection. Confirm polarity.

3. Terminate and connect speaker ends, as appropriate. Confirm polarity.

Multiroom Installation and Setup

+-+-

KPS

)

(

(R/

(

ERP

)

+(L

)+(R/)

I-XUA

)+(L/)-(L

REWOP

KP21

SPEAKER-OUT

RIGHT CHANNEL

SPEAKER-OUT

LEFT CHANNEL

ZONE SPEAKERS

+ – + –

16AWG

TWO-CONDUCTOR STRANDED

SPEAKER WIRE

Figure 31.

KP21 Speaker Connections

+ +

)

(

KPS

)

(L/

)

TUO

ERP

)

(

ERP

)

(

)

(

) +(R/)

-(R

NIXU A

) +(L

-(L

R E

WOP

KP21

WALL MOUNT

IR RECEIVER

+12V

GROUND

IR OUTPUT

WALL-MOUNT

IR RECEIVER

RED/+12V

BLACK/GROUND

WHITE/IR SIGNAL

KP21/IR PIGTAIL CONNECTOR

IR-IN

TERMINAL

Figure 32.

Connecting an External IR Sensor

Keypad Address (Zone Number) Settings

DIP Switch on the side of the KP21. There are 20

address configurations. They can be set using the following table in

Figure 33.

NOTE:

No two keypads can share the same address.

Keypad DIP Switch Settings Address

12 3 4 5 6

1DNUPUPUPUPUP

2UPDNUPUPUPUP

3DNDNUPUPUPUP

4UPUPDNUPUPUP

5DNUPDNUPUPUP

6UPDNDNUPUPUP

7DNDNDNUPUPUP

8UPUPUPDNUPUP

9DNUPUPDNUPUP

10 UP DN UP DN UP UP

11 DN DN UP DN UP UP

12 UP UP DN DN UP UP

13 DN UP DN DN UP UP

14 UP DN DN DN UP UP

15 DN DN DN DN UP UP

16 UP UP UP UP DN UP

17 DN UP UP UP DN UP

18 UP DN UP UP DN UP

19 DN DN UP UP DN UP

20 UP UP DN UP DN UP

Figure 33.

KP21 Address DIP Switch Settings

Main Room (Home Theater) Setup

When all audio, video and system connections have been made, there are a few configuration adjustments that must be made. A few minutes spent to correctly configure and calibrate the unit will greatly add to your listening experience.

Speaker Selection and Placement

The placement of speakers in a multichannel home theater system can have a noticeable impact on the quality of sound reproduced. No matter which type or brand of speakers is used, the same model or brand of speaker should be used for the left front, center and right front speakers. This creates a seamless front soundstage and eliminates the possibility of distracting sonic disturbances that occur when a sound moves across mismatched front channel speakers.

Speaker Placement

Depending on the type of center channel speaker in use and your viewing device, place the center speaker either directly above or below your TV, or in the center, behind a perforated frontprojection screen.

Once the center channel speaker is installed, position the front left and front right speakers so that they are as far away from one another as the center channel speaker is from the preferred listening position. Ideally, the front channel speakers should be placed so that their tweeters are no more than 24" above or below the tweeter in the center channel speaker.

Depending on the specifics of your room acoustics and the type of speakers in use, you may find that imaging is improved by moving the left front and right front speakers slightly forward of the center channel speaker. If possible, adjust all front loudspeakers so that they are aimed at ear height when you are seated in the listening position.

Using these guidelines, you’ll find that it takes some experimentation to find the correct location for the front speakers in your particular installation. Don’t be afraid to move things around until the system sounds correct. Optimize your speakers so that audio transitions across the front of the room sound smooth, and that sounds from all speakers appear to arrive at the listening position at the same time (without delay from the center speaker, compared to the left and right speakers).

Figure 34.

Front-channel Speaker Positioning

System Setup

You are now ready to power up the AVR21EN to begin these final adjustments.

1. Make certain that the AC power cord is firmly inserted into the

AC Power Cord Jack  and plug the cord into an unswitched

AC outlet. To maintain the unit’s safety rating, DO NOT replace the power cord with one that has lower current capacity.

2. Locate the

Main Power Switch  and push it in until it latches.

Note that the LED in the

Standby/On Button 1 will turn red,

indicating that the unit is in the Standby mode.

3. Carefully remove the protective plastic film from the front-panel lens. If left in place, the film will prevent proper operation of the remote control.

4. Install the four supplied AAA batteries in the remote, as shown. Be certain to follow the (+) and (–) polarity indicators that are in the battery compartment.

Figure 36.

AVR21ENR1 Remote Battery Compartment

5. Turn the AVR21EN on by pressing the Standby/On Button 1 on the AVR front panel, or via the remote by pressing the Power

On Button 1

, the AVR Selector 4 or any of the Input

Selectors 3

on the remote. The LED in the Standby/On

Button 1

will turn green to confirm that the unit is on.

Using the On-Screen Display

When making the following adjustments, you may find it easier to use the AVR21EN’s on-screen display system. These easy-to-read displays give you a clear picture of the current status of the unit and make it easy to see which speaker, delay, input or digital selection you are making.

To use the on-screen menus, make certain that you have made a connection between either the

Monitor Component Video

Outputs 

or the Video Monitor Outputs  and the matching

inputs on your TV, display or projector. In order to view the menus, make certain that the proper video input type has been selected on the display, and that any configuration required for the display, such as selection of interlace or progressive scan, has been made. To take advantage of the AVR21EN’s advanced video circuitry, when a component video connection is in use, make certain that the display is configured for “480p, 720p or 1080i,” if available.

Figure 35.

Surround & Rear Speaker Positioning

When the AVR21EN is used in 5.1-channel operation, the preferred location for surround speakers is on the side walls of the room, no more than 10 degrees off axis from the listening position. In a

7.1-channel system, both side surround and back surround speakers are required. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Rear surround speakers are required when a full 7.1-channel system is installed, and they may also be used in 5.1-channel systems as an alternative mounting position when it is not practical to place the main surround speakers on the sides of the room. Speakers may be placed on a rear wall, behind the listening position. When placing surround speakers, it is recommended that they be located so that none of the speakers is more than 2 feet higher than the other. If dipole-type speakers are used on either the side or rear walls of the room, please note that if there are arrows on the speakers, they should face the front of the room for the side speakers, or face toward the center of the wall for the rear speakers.

Subwoofers produce nondirectional sound, so they may be placed almost anywhere in a room. Actual placement should be based on room size and shape and the type of subwoofer used. One method of finding the optimal location for a subwoofer is to begin by placing it in the front of the room, about 6 inches from a wall, or near the front corner of the room. Another method is to temporarily place the subwoofer at your normal listening position, and then walk around the room until you find a spot where the subwoofer sounds best. Place the subwoofer in that spot. You should also follow the instructions of the subwoofer’s manufacturer, or you may wish to experiment with the best location for a subwoofer in your listening room.

System Setup

Once the speakers have been placed in the room and connected, the remaining steps in the setup process are to configure system and source settings, program the AVR21EN for the type of speakers used in your system, set the delay times used by the surround sound processor and configure the output settings.

System Setup

IMPORTANT NOTE: When viewing the on-screen menus using a

CRT-based projector, plasma display or direct-view CRT monitor or television, it is important that they not be left on for an extended period of time. The constant display of a static image such as these menus may cause the image to be permanently “burned into” the projection tubes, plasma screen or CRT. This type of damage is not covered by the AVR21EN warranty and may not be covered by the projector/TV set’s warranty.

The AVR21EN has two on-screen display modes, “Semi-OSD” and “Full-OSD.” When making configuration adjustments, it is recommended that the full-OSD mode be used. This will place an easily viewed list of the available options on the screen.

Making Configuration Adjustments

The full-OSD system is available by pressing the AVR (System)

Button 4

followed by the Menu Button  on the AVR21ENR1

Main Room remote. When these buttons are pressed, the MAIN MENU (

Figure 37) will appear, and adjustments are made from

the individual menus.

Figure 37.

Main Menu

The semi-OSD system is also available, allowing you to make adjustments directly, by pressing the appropriate buttons on the AVR21EN front panel or AVR21ENR1 remote control for the specific parameter to be adjusted. For example, to change the surround mode for any of the sources, on the remote, press the

Surround

Button C

and then press the ⁄/

Navigation Buttons F or on

the AVR front panel, press the

Surround Mode Group Selector 3

and then the Surround Mode Selector 4 to scroll through the list of options as they appear in the on-screen display or in the

Lower Display Line .

To use the full-OSD menu system, press the

AVR Button 4

followed by the Menu Button . When the menu is on the screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Buttons F until the on-screen

cursor is next to the item you wish to adjust, and then press the

Set Button H to adjust that item. The menus will remain on the

screen for 20 seconds, and then they will “time-out” and disappear from the screen. The time-out may be increased to as much as 180 seconds by going to the ADVANCED menu, and changing the item titled MAIN MENU TIMEOUT.

When the full-OSD system is in use, the menu selections are not shown in the AVR

Upper or Lower Display Lines . When the

full-OSD menu system is used,

MENU will appear in the Upper

Display Line 

to remind you that a video display must be used.

When the semi-OSD system is used in conjunction with the discrete

* * MAIN MENU * *

CLOCK SETUP MAIN ROOM SETUP ZONE SETUP REMOTE CONTROL SETUP RESET MULTIROOM SETTINGS DIAGNOSTICS

EXIT MENU

configuration buttons, the on-screen display will show a single line of text with the current menu selection. That selection will also be shown in the

Upper or Lower Display Lines , depending on

which parameter is being adjusted.

Setting the System Configuration Memory

The AVR21EN features an advanced memory system that enables you to establish audio and video parameters for each input source. This flexibility enables you to customize the way in which you listen to each source and have the AVR21EN memorize those settings. This means, for example, that you may set different speaker configurations with the resultant changes to the bass management system. Thanks to the use of exclusive Audioaccess circuitry and software, along with DCDi

by Faroudja technology, you may also customize the video settings for each input source to display consistent, high-quality video images when the AVR21EN is used in conjunction with a digital or high-definition display. Once these settings are made, they will automatically be recalled whenever you select an input.

The factory default settings for audio inputs vary by source and are detailed in the Appendix. They have been setup for typical use based upon their intended source (e.g., “digital in” for Disc, “analog” in for Cable). The default for all speaker settings has the front set to “Small” with all others set to

NONE, so you can

configure the speakers to the specific use of this system. Logic 7 Music is the default surround mode for all sources, with Dolby

Digital or DTS®being selected automatically when an appropriate digital source is in use and a digital bitstream is detected.

The factory default settings for video have all inputs configured for AUTO. This means the AVR will automatically select the highest quality signal available (component, S-video then composite) when a given source is selected. The default video settings are listed in the

Appendix. Note, however, that most of the video default

settings are only applicable when a component connection to a digital-ready or HDTV monitor is in use. Both the video and audio settings for all inputs may be changed, as shown in the following pages.

Before using the unit, you may want to change the settings for some inputs so that they are properly configured to reflect the use of digital or analog inputs, the type of speakers installed and the surround mode specifics of your home theater system. Remember that since the AVR21EN memorizes the settings for each input individually, you will need to make these adjustments for each input used. However, once they are made, further adjustment is only required when system components are changed. Also note that speaker configuration (

MAIN ROOM SETUP/SYSTEM CONFIGURATION) is global to the system. The AVR will not

change speaker configuration by source. It can change surround modes by source if desired.

To make this process as quick and as easy as possible, we suggest that you use the full-OSD system with the on-screen menus, and step through each input. Once you have completed the settings for the first input, many settings may be duplicated for the remaining inputs. It is also a good idea to set the configuration data in the order these items are listed in the

MASTER MENU, as some

settings require a specific entry in a prior menu item.

System Setup

Sources

The first step is to configure each input. Once an input is configured, the selection of an input will automatically recall those settings from a nonvolatile memory. For that reason, the procedures described below must be repeated for each input source so that you have the opportunity to customize each source to your specific listening and viewing requirements. However, once made, they need not be changed again unless you need to alter a setting. When using the full-OSD system to make the setup adjustments, on the remote, press the

AVR Button 4 once

followed by the

Menu Button  so that the MAIN MENU

appears.

In MAIN ROOM SETUP, using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F,

align the cursor with SOURCES. Press the

Set Button H. In the

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO CHANGE ? window, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, to align the cursor with YES.

Press the

Set Button H. The SOURCES 1 screen will appear

(

Figure 40). Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the

desired input name appears.

As you scroll through the list of inputs, you may notice that the video will occasionally switch to black, and you will hear a slight click. This is normal and does not indicate any problem with the AVR21EN. When the video turns to black, that is your indication that the processor has momentarily muted the signal while the proper video settings for each input are reestablished by the Faroudja processor. The clicking noise is caused by the use of a relay to switch between the component video inputs for the highest signal quality and to minimize video crosstalk.

Figure 40.

Sources 1 Screen

Source Name

When any input is selected as the source, you have the option of changing the name that appears in the on-screen and front-panel messages. This allows you to associate a specific product brand or other name with the input, or to simply enter any name that will help you to remember which source is being selected.

To change the input name, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

on the remote so that the cursor is pointing to NAME. Next, press the

Set Button H until a flashing box appears to the right of the

colon. Immediately release the

Set Button H, as you are now

ready to enter the device name.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F and a complete set of alpha-

numeric characters will be available with the start of the alphabet in capital letters, followed by the lowercase letters and then num-

* * SOURCES 1 * *

SOURCE: DISC 1 NAME: AUDIO INPUT: ANALOG AUDIO INPUT DETECT: N/A AUDIO MODE: LOGIC 7 A. TYPE : MUSIC 7.1

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

NIGHT MODE: N/A

DEVICE PRIORITY

GO TO SOURCES 2

Clock Setup

When the Main Menu Appears, the first item to be set is the system clock. The cursor will be next to the CLOCK SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H and CLOCK SETUP (Figure 38) will appear

on the screen.

Figure 38.

Clock Setup

With the cursor next to HOUR, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button

to set HOUR. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor to MINUTE. Repeat these two steps until AM/PM, YEAR, MONTH, DAY and DAYLIGHT SAVINGS have been

set to local time. When finished, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to move the cursor to BACK TO MAIN MENU. Press the

Set Button H. The Main Menu will appear.

Main Room Setup

In the OSD Main Menu, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to

move the cursor next to MAIN ROOM SETUP. Press the

Set

Button H

to select the Main Room Setup.

Figure 39.

Main Room Setup Screen

System Configuration

The System Configuration setting sets the AVR for the particular speaker configuration being used. With the cursor next to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, press the

Set Button H. The

System Configuration Menu will appear. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

, align the cursor to 5.1 CHANNEL if using a

Front/Rear/Sub speaker configuration, or 7.1 CHANNEL if using a Front/Side/Rear/Sub speaker configuration, and press the

Set

Button H

. Select YES in the ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT

TO CHANGE ? window. The System Configuration Menu will

appear. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, align the cursor

with BACK TO MAIN ROOM. Press the

Set Button H. The

MAIN ROOM SETUP will appear.

System Setup

* * CLOCK SETUP * *

HOUR MINUTE PM YEAR MONTH DAY DAYLIGHT SAVINGS?

: 01

: 2006

: : 14

BACK TO MAIN MENU

* * MAIN ROOM SETUP * *

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SOURCES EZSET EQ SPEAKERS LIP SYNC :50ms REC OUT :ANALOG VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS DEVICE PRIORITY ADVANCED

BACK TO MAIN MENU

bers and symbols. Press the button either way, until the first letter of the desired name appears. If you wish to enter a blank space as the first character, press the

›

Navigation Button F.

The

Alphanumeric Buttons  can also be used for entering

Source names. With the flashing box in the NAME field as described above, press the alphanumeric button with the first letter of the desired name. For “DVD” press the “DEF” button. A “D” will appear on screen. Press the

›

Navigation Button F to move

the flashing box. Next press the “TUV” button. For “V,” press the button twice until “V” appears. If you wish to enter a blank space, press the

›

Navigation Button F.

When the desired character appears, press the

›

Navigation

Button F

and repeat the process for the next letter. Continue until the desired name is entered, up to 14 characters. When the name is complete, press the

Set Button H to enter it into the

system memory. Repeat for all inputs where specific source names are desired.

Source Audio Input

To associate a particular analog or digital input with an input source, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fwhile the SOURCES 1 menu

is on the screen, until the cursor moves to the AUDIO INPUT line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Funtil the desired input

appears.

To change the digital or analog input at any time using the discrete function buttons and the semi-OSD system, press the

Audio Input

Button A

on the remote. Within 5 seconds, make your input selection using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Funtil the desired

digital or analog input is shown in the AVR

Upper Display Line 

and in the lower line of the on-screen display. Press the Set Button

to enter the new digital or analog input assignment.

Some digital video input sources, such as a cable box or HDTV settop, may change between analog and digital outputs, depending on which channel is in use. The AVR21EN’s Auto Polling feature allows you to avoid losing the audio feed when this happens, by permitting both analog and digital connections to the same source on the AVR21EN. For some inputs, digital audio is the default, and the unit will automatically switch to the analog audio if the digital audio stream stops.

In cases where only a digital source is used, you may wish to disable the Auto Polling feature to prevent the AVR21EN from trying to “find” an analog source when the digital source is paused. To turn Auto Polling off for any input, first make certain that the cursor is pointing to the

AUDIO INPUT DETECT line on the menu

screen. Next, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fso that NO

appears. Repeat the procedure at any time by selecting YES to restore the Auto Polling feature.

Audio Mode

The next step is to set the surround mode you wish to use with the input selected in SOURCES 1. Since surround modes are a matter of personal taste, feel free to select any mode you wish – you may change it later. However, to make it easier to establish the initial parameters for the AVR21EN, it is best to select Dolby

Pro Logic®II (Movie or Music) or Logic 7®(Cinema or Music) for most analog inputs, and Dolby Digital for inputs connected to digital sources. In the case of inputs such as a CD player, tape deck

or tuner, you may wish to set the mode to Stereo (“Surround Off”) as they are not typically used with multichannel program material, and it is unlikely that surround-encoded material will be used. Alternatively, the Logic 7 Music mode is a good choice for stereoonly source material. See the

Main Room Operation/Surround

Mode Selection

and Digital Audio Playback sections for more

information on available surround modes.

For digital program material, the AVR will always examine the data stream and automatically select a Dolby Digital or DTS

mode, as

applicable.

It is easiest to complete the surround setup using the full-OSD on-screen menus. From the SOURCES 1 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to the AUDIO

MODE line. Each option in this menu selects the surround mode

category (AUDIO MODE line) and within each of those categories there will be a choice of the specific mode options (the A.TYPE line).

The choice of modes will vary according to the speaker configuration in your system. When the AVR21EN is configured for 5.1-channel operation, and the SURR BACK line of the SPEAKER SETUP menu is set to NONE, only the modes appropriate to a five-speaker system will appear. When the AVR21EN is configured for 7.1-channel operation, and the SURR BACK line of the SPEAKER SETUP menu is set to SMALL or LARGE, additional modes such as Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS-ES

will appear, as they are only available when seven main speakers are present. In addition, some of the modes available in the AVR21EN will not appear unless a digital source is selected and is playing the correct bitstream.

To select the mode that will be used as the initial default for an input, first press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Funtil the cursor is

next to AUDIO MODE. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fto

select a master category name, such as DOLBY, DTS, DSP (SURR). Next, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fto move the

on-screen cursor next to A.TYPE. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button

to scroll through the available choices.

The following paragraphs detail the instructions needed for modes with multiple choices.

DOLBY

The Dolby Surround choices include Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Movie and Music, Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Virtual Speaker Reference or Wide. For a complete description of the different Dolby surround modes, see the

Main Room Operation/

Surround Mode Selection

section. The Dolby Digital EX and Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes are only available when the system is set for 7.1 operation by configuring the Surround Back speakers to “Small” or “Large,” as described in the

AVR21EN Configuration/

Speaker Setup

section. When a disc is playing with a Dolby Digital soundtrack that contains a special “flag” signal in the data stream, the Dolby Digital EX mode will be selected automatically. It may also be selected using this menu or through the front-panel or remote controls, as described in

Main Room Operation/Surround

Mode Selection.

When the cursor is pointing to the AUDIO MODE line, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fto select the desired Dolby surround

mode, again remembering that the choice of available modes will

System Setup

When an analog or 2-channel PCM source is playing, the DTS Neo:6 modes are available, which creates a 3-, 5- or 6-channel presentation of the sound. The exact modes available will depend on the number of speaker positions established in the SPEAKER CONFIG- URATION menu. (See the

AVR21EN Configuration/Speaker

Setup

section to configure the system for the number and type of

speakers in your system.)

Logic 7

With LOGIC 7 selected in SOURCES 1/AUDIO MODE, the choices available are determined by whether the 5.1- or 7.1-channel configuration is in use. In either case, the selection of a Logic 7 mode enables our exclusive Logic 7 processing to create multichannel surround from 2-channel stereo or matrix-encoded programming such as VHS cassettes or television broadcasts produced with Dolby Surround.

With 5.1 configurations, you may select the Logic 7/5.1 Music, Cinema or Enhance mode. They work best with surround-encoded programs or 2-channel programming of any type. For 6.1 / 7.1 configurations, the Music and Cinema modes may be selected. The Logic 7 modes are not available when either Dolby Digital or DTS Digital soundtracks are in use. See the

Main Room

Operation/Surround Mode Selection

and Digital Audio

Playback

sections for an explanation of the Logic 7 modes.

DSP

In the DSP (SURR) menu, the choices made with the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fselect one of the DSP surround modes

designed for use with 2-channel stereo programs to create a variety of sound field presentations. The Hall and Theater modes are designed for multichannel installations. See the

Main Room

Operation/Surround Mode Selection

and Digital Audio

Playback

sections for an explanation of the DSP surround modes.

Stereo

In the STEREO menu, the choices made with the ‹/

›

Navigation

Button F

include a traditional 2-channel stereo presentation that

uses only the left and right front speakers. When SURROUND OFF is selected, the unit is in a full bypass mode with no bass management or other processing applied to the signal, as it is routed directly from the input to the volume stage. When SURROUND OFF + DSP is selected, you will still have a 2-channel presentation, but bass management is applied.

You may also select a 5 CH STEREO and 7 CH STEREO mode, depending on how many speakers are available. These two modes feed a 2-channel presentation to the front left/right and surround speakers, as stereo pairs, with a mix of the left and right channels fed to the center speakers. See the

Main Room Operation/

Surround Mode Selection

and Digital Audio Playback sections

for a complete explanation of the stereo modes.

FRONT-PANEL CONNECTIONS

In addition to the rear-panel digital and analog outputs, the AVR21EN offers our exclusive configurable front-panel output-jack feature. For easy connection of portable devices, you may switch the front-panel

Coaxial 3 F and Game/Cam Jacks IJLM

from an input to an output by following these steps:

1. Press the

AVR Button 4 on the remote to enter system mode.

2. Press the

Menu Button  to view the on-screen MAIN MENU.

vary with the type of program material being played and the number of speakers in your system configuration.

When the DOLBY DIGITAL mode is selected, there are additional settings available for the Night mode.

Night mode is a feature of Dolby Digital that preserves the dynamic range and full intelligibility of a movie soundtrack while reducing the peak level. This prevents abruptly loud transitions from disturbing others, without reducing the sonic impact of a digital source. Night mode is only available when specially encoded Dolby Digital signals are played. To adjust the Night mode setting, make certain that the on-screen cursor is on the NIGHT MODE line with DOLBY selected in AUDIO MODE. Next, press

‹/›

Navigation Button F

to choose between the following settings, as they appear in the on-screen display:

OFF: When OFF is shown, Night Mode will not function.

MEDIUM: When MEDIUM is shown, a mild compression will

be applied.

MAXIMUM: When MAXIMUM is shown, a more severe

compression algorithm will be applied.

We recommend that you select the medium setting as a starting point and change to the maximum setting later, if desired.

Night mode may also be adjusted directly any time a Dolby Digital source is playing by first pressing the

AVR Button 4 and then

pressing the

Night Button  on the remote. When the Night

button is pressed, Night Mode Status (OFF, MED, MAX) will appear in the lower third of the video screen and in the

AVR

Lower Display Line . Press the Night Button  within

3 seconds to select the desired setting.

When all settings for the surround setup have been made, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fso that the cursor is next to BACK

TO MAIN ROOM, and press the

Set Button H to return to the

MAIN ROOM SETUP.

DTS

With DTS®selected in SOURCES 1/AUDIO MODE, the selection choices made with the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fon the remote

are determined by a combination of the type of program material in use and whether the 5.1- or 7.1-channel configuration is selected in System Configuration.

When a DTS digitally encoded source is playing, the choice of modes for 7.1 systems will vary according to the program source (DTS 5.1, DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete). Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fto scroll through the choices available for

your system and the program in use. The DTS Neo:6

Music mode is available with analog and PCM digital stereo sources and the DTS Neo:6 Cinema mode may be used with matrix surround-encoded sources for an enhanced 5.1-channel sound field.

When the 5.1 configuration is in use, the AVR will automatically select the 5.1 version of DTS processing. When 7.1 mode is selected, the DTS-ES Discrete mode will automatically be activated for DTS sources with the ES Discrete “flag.” When a non-ES DTS disc is in use, you may select the DTS-ES Matrix mode to create a full 7.1 surround mode. See the

Main Room Operation/Surround Mode

Selection

and Digital Audio Playback sections for an explanation

of the DTS modes.

System Setup

3. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to place the cursor next to

MAIN ROOM SETUP. Press the

Set Button H.

4. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to place the cursor next to

SOURCES. Press the

Set Button H.

5. In the ARE YOU SURE ? screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

to place the cursor next to YES. Press the

Set Button H.

6. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F so that the source selected

is GAME/CAM.

7. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that cursor is next to

GO TO SOURCES 2. Press the

Set Button H.

8. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so the cursor is next to

DIGITAL COAX, to make a digital audio recording or, position the cursor next to FRONT PANEL AV to make an analog A/V recording using the appropriate front panel jacks.

9. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to change the status to

OUT. (There will be an audible click in the AVR as it changes configuration.)

Once the setting is made, the

Input/Output Status Indicator

will turn red, indicating that the jacks are now outputs, instead of in the default setting as inputs. Once changed to outputs, the setting will remain as long as the AVR21EN is turned on, unless the setting is changed in the OSD menu system, as described above. However, once the AVR21EN is turned off, the setting is canceled. When the unit is turned on again, the front-panel jacks will return to their normal default setting as inputs. If you wish to use the jacks as outputs at a future time, the setting must be changed again using the OSD menu system, as described above.

Video Input

To reach the VIDEO INPUT and VIDEO SETTINGS menus, first, press the

AVR Button 4, on the remote and then press the

Menu Button . When the MAIN MENU appears on your video

screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Funtil the on-screen

cursor is pointing to MAIN ROOM SETUP and press the

Set

Button H

again. The MAIN ROOM SETUP will appear on-screen.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Funtil the on-screen cursor is

pointing to SOURCES and press the

Set Button H again. Press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fto move the cursor to YES In the

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO CHANGE ? screen and

press the

Set Button H. The SOURCES 1 screen will appear.

(If already in SETUP for a particular source, continue. Otherwise with the cursor next to SOURCE, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button

to select the source to be configured.) Press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor to GO TO SOURCES 2. Press the

Set Button H. The SOURCES 2 screen will appear.

The cursor will default to VIDEO INPUT. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fto select the appropriate input. The default

is AUTO. Auto will poll the component, S- and composite video jacks for a given source until it finds a signal and will then choose the highest quality signal available for that input. This is recommended for most applications.

Video Settings

The AVR21EN is unique among audio/video receivers in that it not only includes an onboard video processing system using DCDi by Faroudja technology, but also allows the video controls to be individually set for each video input source. This permits you to compensate for the problems inherent in older technologies such as VCR while taking the maximum advantage of new source options such as DVD, digital cable and satellite programming.

IMPORTANT NOTE: The video processor is only available when the

AVR21EN is connected to a “digital-ready” or HDTV video display, which is defined as a product that is able to accommodate input sources of 480p or greater through Y/Pr/Pb analog component inputs or an HDMI connection. If your video display does not have that capability, you may skip the settings in this section, as they will not apply to your home theater system. In addition, note that the video processor is only active when the input signals are standard 480i analog video or 480p analog video as output from sources such as progressive scan DVD players. When HDTV signals of 720p or 1080i are in use, they are passed directly through to the display without any processing.

The

SOURCES 2 menu defines the Source Video Input. The

VIDEO SETTINGS submenus contain the individual parameters

that will be applied to the specific video input in use. Before proceeding with the setup, we suggest that you look at the default settings for each input, which are listed in the

Appendix to

this manual. If the settings for any input mirror the configuration of your home theater system, then no further adjustment is needed.

It is worth noting that the impact of many of the individual settings is subtle, and it is only when they are grouped together that the full power of the video processing system is unleashed. That means that there is no “right” or “wrong” setting in many cases, and the setting that seems best to you is the one that is truly correct for your specific combination of equipment, room environment and personal viewing preferences. Feel free to experiment with different setting combinations, as you can’t impair anything by doing so.

When you do reach the combination of settings for both your display system and each input, it is a good idea to write those settings down using the worksheets found in the

Appendix.

NOTE:

All of the menus in the video setup system are viewed over the video source that is currently playing. In order to see the impact of any menu setting changes in the video in real time, you must first turn on the Faroudja

processing system by pressing

either the

Faroudja Button 7 on the remote or the AVR front

panel

Set Button 7 and releasing the button so that FAROUDJA:

ON appears in the semi-OSD message and in the

Lower Display

Line 

In the SOURCES 2 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

to move the cursor to VIDEO SETTINGS. Press the Set Button

. The VIDEO SETTINGS 1 screen will appear (Figure 41).

System Setup

To continue Video Input Setup, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button

to place the cursor next to GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 2.

Press the

Set Button H. The VIDEO SETTINGS 2 screen will

appear (

Figure 42).

Figure 42.

Video Settings 2 Screen

Film Mode Edit Detect: When this setting is on, additional pro-

cessing is applied when film-based material is detected so that any disruption in the frame sequence of film-based material due to video edits or the overlay of video text over film is compensated for, before artifacts such as feathering appear.

Flesh-Tone Noise Reduction: When this setting is on, the process-

ing is adapted to preserve the detail in faces and flesh tones while reducing noise in the total picture.

Composite Video Enhance: When this setting is on, composite

video signals are processed at the level set in the main VIDEO menu to adjust the high-frequency content of the signal. This setting acts on the vertical and horizontal, as well as the luminance and chrominance signals, to offer what will appear as enhanced depth in the picture, as well as greater small-object detail.

VCR Sync-Time Enhance: When this setting is turned on,

circuits are applied to correct irregular sync timing signals, which are common when a VCR is in use. The enhancement provided is similar to the effect achieved by using the tracking control on a VCR.

To continue Video Input Setup, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to place the cursor next to GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 3.

Press the

Set Button H. The VIDEO SETTINGS 3 screen will

appear (

Figure 43).

Figure 43.

Video Settings 3 Screen

* * VIDEO SETTINGS 3 * *

SOURCE: DISC 1

FILM MODE EDIT DET: ON

BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST

SATURATION

DCDi INTERPOLATION: ON

BACK TO SOURCES

FILM MODE DETECT: ON

GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 1 GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 2

BACK TO SOURCES

: 100 : 100

: 100

* * VIDEO SETTINGS 2 * *

SOURCE: DISC 1 FILM MODE EDIT DET: ON FLESHTONE NOIS RED: ON COMP VIDEO ENHANCE: ON VCR SYNC TIME ENH: ON

DCDi INTERPOLATION: ON

BACK TO SOURCES

FILM MODE DETECT: ON

GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 3 GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 1

BACK TO SOURCES

Figure 41.

Video Settings 1 Screen

Input Aspect Ratio: This setting tells the video processing circuits

what the aspect ratio is for the input in use. To change the default setting, when the VIDEO SETTINGS 1 menu is on the screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fso that the on-screen cursor is

pointing to IN ASPECT RATIO and then press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

to select the desired choice.

Scaling: This setting is used to adapt a standard NTSC 4:3 screen

image to “fit” a 16:9 display.

I NONE: This setting will orient a standard NTSC 4:3 image in the

middle of a 16:9 display in its normal aspect ratio, leaving black bands on either side of the image.

I LINEAR: This setting will stretch the 4:3 image across the 16:9

display and will typically make the image look flattened.

I NONLINEAR: This setting will place the 4:3 image in the center

of the 16:9 display in its normal aspect ratio and gradually stretch the image toward the left and right edges of the screen. In slow-action video, there is little noticeable effect. In fastaction video, there is almost a “fishbowl” effect at the far edges of the display.

Enhance Level: If you wish to change the default setting to suit

your specific display type, input sources and personal image preferences, when the VIDEO SETTINGS 1 menu is on the screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fso that the on-screen

cursor is pointing to ENHANCE LEVEL and then press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fto enter the setting that delivers the best

image to your eyes on the scale of 0 to 100.

Noise Reduction: When this setting is turned on, there is a

reduction in the video noise that is often present in analog input sources.

X-Color Suprression: When this setting is on, there is a reduction

in the cross-color interference that typically appears in composite video sources as moiré in finely detailed objects.

DCDi Interpolation: DCDi stands for directional correlation

de-interlacing. It is a Faroudja technology that examines each pixel for the optimal direction from which to interpolate the video information with regard to local edges. This adaptive process prevents the appearance of staircasing and the jagged edges that are often visible with other means of de-interlacing.

Film Mode Detect: When this setting is on, special circuits are

used to detect the presence of film-originated material so that the original film-frame sequence may be recovered by weaving together the appropriate video fields.

System Setup

* * VIDEO SETTINGS 1 * *

SOURCE: DISC 1 IN ASPECT RATIO: 4:3 SCALING: NONE ENHANCE LEVEL: 32 NOISE REDUCTION: OFF X COLOR SUPPRESSOR: ON DCDi INTERPOLATION: ON FILM MODE DETECT: ON GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 2

BACK TO SOURCES

Brightness: The changes to this setting are similar to the Brightness

control on your display, changing the video level. If circumstances are such that a source has a low signal and appears dark, you may wish to change this setting, but be careful not to increase it to the point where the video display is overdriven into clipping or blooming.

Contrast: The changes to this setting are similar to the Contrast

control on your display, changing the black level to compensate for poor contrast.

Saturation: The changes to this setting are similar to the Color

control on your display, and may be used as needed to compensate for over- or under-color-saturation.

When all settings for that require adjustment have been made, use the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fto move the on-screen cursor

next to GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 1 or GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 2 to confirm or change settings and then press the

Set Button H, or to return to the sources settings page, move

the on-screen cursor next to the BACK TO SOURCES line in and press the

Set Button H. To exit setup, press the Exit Button G

on the remote.

EzSet/EQ

™

The AVR21EN is one of the first receivers in its class to offer automated speaker setup and system calibration. This process greatly simplifies the installation of your new receiver by using a series of test signals and the power of an advanced digital signal processing system to eliminate the need for manual adjustment of speaker “size,” crossover, delay and output level settings, while adding the power of a multi-band parametric equalizer to smooth out any peculiarities in frequency response that may result from the characteristics of the listening room. With EzSet/EQ, your new receiver even alerts you to errors in speaker connections that prevent a speaker from functioning.

EzSet/EQ enables you to calibrate your system in a fraction of the time it would take to enter the settings manually, and with results that rival those achieved with expensive test equipment and timeconsuming procedures. The end result is a system calibration profile that enables your new receiver to deliver the best possible sound, no matter what type of speakers you have or what the dimensions of your listening room are. We recommend that you take advantage of the precision of EzSet/EQ to calibrate your system, but, if desired, you may also make any of the configuration settings manually, or trim the settings provided by EzSet/EQ by following the instructions in

Main Room Operation/Output Level

Trim Adjustment.

Step 1:

EzSet/EQ requires that your listening room have as little background noise as possible to avoid interfering with the measurement of tones produced by your AVR during the setup procedure. Turn off all loud fans, air conditioners and other equipment, and try to avoid making any noise during the process.

Step 2: The EzSet/EQ microphone should be placed in either your

usual listening position or, if there is a large seating area, the center of the room, at the listeners’ ear level. You may find it convenient to use a camera tripod for stable placement of the EzSet/EQ microphone at the correct height. The microphone includes a threaded insert on the bottom for tripod mounting.

Step 3: Plug the EzSet/EQ microphone into the AVR21EN’s Optimizer MIC Jack B, making certain that the microphone is

firmly connected. The microphone cable is approximately 20 feet long, which should accommodate most listening room situations. If required, you may use an optional extension cable, available at most electronics stores, for use in larger rooms. However, we recommend that you avoid using extension cords for the microphone cable, as they may adversely affect the test results.

Step 4: Once the microphone is properly positioned and plugged

in, proceed to the EzSet/EQ menus by first pressing the

Button 

to bring the MASTER MENU to the screen. Next,

press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fto move the on-screen cursor

to the EzSet/EQ menu line. Press the

Set Button H to move to

the next screen (

Figure 44).

Step 5: The first screen of the EzSet/EQ system will now appear to

remind you to plug in the microphone. If you have not already done so, plug the microphone into the

Optimizer MIC Jack B

as described in steps 2 and 3. When you are ready to proceed, make certain that the cursor is pointing to YES and press the

Set Button H. If you do not wish to continue with the EzSet/EQ

process, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fso that the cursor

points to NO, and then press the

Set Button H to return to the

MASTER MENU. Note that if you attempt to move to the next menu without plugging in the microphone, a reminder message will flash at the bottom of the screen.

Figure 44.

EzSet/EQ Start Menu

Step 6: After entering YES to start the EzSet/EQ system, you will

next see a warning message (

Figure 45), and the screen will then

change to the main EzSet/EQ menu. The WARNING screen is a reminder that in order for the system to perform accurate measurements, it is important that the listening room be as quiet as possible. After 5 seconds, the screen will change again to display the main EzSet/EQ menu.

Figure 45.

EzSet/EQ Warning

* EzSet/EQ *

WARNING

listening position and

During measurements please maintain silence.

Loud test signal bursts will be heard.

BACK TO SOURCES

- NOTE Do you want to start EzSet/EQ?

YES NO

* EzSet/EQ *

Place Microphone at listening position and plug into Mic Jack

POINT ORIGINAL REM TO AVR DISPLAY, PRESS KEY UNTIL SOURCE TURNS OFF

BACK TO SOURCES

- NOTE -

Do you want to start EzSet/EQ?

YES NO

System Setup

and doorways. During the measurement and calibration process, you may observe the progress of the testing by reading the messages that appear in the second line of the menu listing. When the EzSet/EQ screen first appears, it contains a series of dashes, but as the test and measurement proceeds, you will see the following messages as the individual measurements are taken:

System Level: A SETTING LEVEL message will appear to

indicate that the system is setting the overall volume level to the proper level as a prelude to testing the individual channels. During this test, you will see this line of the menu screen change as the volume level is adjusted.

Speaker Check: The system will circulate a test signal to deter-

mine which channels have a speaker connected. During this test, you will see the name of each channel position displayed while a signal is sent to that speaker.

NOTE: While this test detects whether a speaker is connected to

a particular output, it cannot determine whether the speaker is in the correct position. (For example, it can tell whether a speaker is connected to the Surround Right output, but it cannot tell whether the speaker is on the right or left side of your listening room.) For that reason, we strongly recommend that you try to listen as the tone circulates, matching the name shown for each channel to the location of the speaker. If a tone is heard from a speaker position that does not match the on-screen message, stop EzSet/EQ, exit the menus, turn your receiver off and check for proper speaker connections on the rear panel before resuming the setup. When this test is complete,

YES will be shown to the

right of SPEAKER CHECK on the menu screen.

Speaker Delay: This test will circulate the tones again as the

name of each channel is shown to measure the distance from the microphone to each speaker. The results of these tests will be used to set the delay time settings for each active speaker position. When this test is complete, a speaker-to-microphone (listening position) distance will be shown to the right of the SPEAKER DELAY line on the menu screen.

NOTE: A/V Sync Delay may only be set manually. See the AVR21EN Configuration/Lip Sync

section.

Speaker Level: This test circulates a test signal and measures

the output from each active speaker position. The results of the measurements are used to adjust the individual channel outputs as needed, so that they are identical. This is an essential element of ensuring that surround sound fields are properly reproduced. If desired, you may use the results of the automated testing as a baseline and then make manual adjustments to trim the output levels to your personal taste, following the instructions described in

Main Room Operation/Output Level Trim

Adjustment.

When this test is complete, an output level

adjustment number will be shown to the right of the SPEAKER LEVEL line on the menu screen.

Speaker Size: The measurements and calculations for this test

take place at the same time the test signals are circulated to calculate the output levels, and they are used to determine whether the speakers in your system are “large” or “small,” for the purposes of bass management. (If desired, you may make manual adjustments to the speaker size settings, following the instructions described in

Speaker Setup/Speaker Configuration

IMPORTANT NOTE:

Anyone with hearing that is sensitive to loud noises should leave the room at this point, or use ear protection sufficient to reduce the noise level. Inexpensive foam-style ear plugs, available at most drug stores, may be used to reduce the sound level to a tolerable level. If you are uncomfortable with, or cannot tolerate, loud sounds and do not use some sort of ear protection, we strongly recommend that you leave the room and ask someone else to run the EzSet/EQ process, or that you do not use EzSet/EQ and enter the configuration settings manually, as described in

Main Room Operation/Output Level Trim Adjustment.

Step 7:

While the main EzSet/EQ menu is visible, you may start

and stop the calibration process, or monitor the progress of the measurements and view the results. When the screen first appears, you will see MEASUREMENT: STOP on the first line of the menu list. To start the EzSet/EQ test process, you must first tell the system how many speakers are in your system. To do that, choose one of these two options:

I If your system includes a full complement of seven main speakers

(front left, center, front right, surround right, surround back right, surround back left, surround left) and a subwoofer, and

7.1 has been set in SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fso that 7.1 appears to the right of

MEASUREMENT, and then press the

Set Button H to start

EzSet/EQ.

I If your system includes a traditional surround speaker comple-

ment of five main speakers (front left, center, front right, surround right, surround left) and a subwoofer, and 5.1 has been set in SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button Fso that 5.1 appears to the right of

MEASUREMENT and then press the

Set Button H to start

EzSet/EQ. To stop the calibration process at any time, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fto move the on-screen cursor to the

MEASUREMENT line; press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F so

that STOP appears and then press the

Set Button H.

Figure 46.

EzSet/EQ Settings

Step 8: Once EzSet/EQ has been started, you will hear test signals

circulate among all of the speakers as the system sets the master volume level, checks for the presence of speakers, sets the distance measurement and calculates delay time settings, sets the output level for each speaker, sets the speaker “size,” and sets the speaker crossover point, and automatically equalizes the frequency response to eliminate any artifacts or reverberation that may occur due to the specific room characteristics, such as alcoves

System Setup

MEASUREMENT SETTING LEVEL SPEAKER CHECK SPEAKER DIST SPEAKER LEVEL SPEAKER SIZE SPEAKER X-OVER SAVE SETTING BACK TO MAIN ROOM

YES NO

BACK TO SOURCES

* EzSet/EQ *

: STOP

: - - - : - - - -

: - - - : - - - : - - - : - - - -

SETTING LEVEL

and Bass Management.) When this test is complete, an output level adjustment number will be shown to the right of the SPEAKER SIZE line on the menu screen.

Speaker Crossover: The measurements and calculations for

this test take place at the same time as the test signal is circulated to calculate the levels, and they are used to determine the crossover setting for each speaker in your system to create a seamless transition between the frequencies sent to your main speakers and subwoofer (if available). If desired, you may use the results of the automated testing as a baseline and then make manual adjustments to the crossover settings, following the instructions described in

Speaker Setup/Crossovers.

When this test is complete, a crossover frequency will be shown to the right of the SPEAKER X-OVER line on the menu screen.

Room Equalization: Each room has unique characteristics that

may affect the frequency response at the listening position. For example, doorways and alcoves can increase bass response nearby. Various surfaces such as hard floors or windows, or soft carpets or draperies, may also affect the way the room responds to sound. Until now, expensive testing devices and long hours of taking measurements and adjusting room furnishings were required in order to smooth out the frequency response to avoid artifacts. EzSet/EQ simplifies equalization, delivering world-class performance without the extra expense. While the test tone circulates, EzSet/EQ is able to obtain a sonic “view” of the room and its characteristics, and adjust the receiver’s output accordingly to customize performance to the listening room.

Step 9: When all measurements are successfully completed, the

test signals will stop and a TEST DONE UNPLUG MIC message will appear in the second line. The cursor will pause at SAVE SETTINGS, allowing you the option of selecting YES or NO. Unplug the microphone and store it in a safe place so that it is available to recalibrate your system, if needed, due to a change in speakers, preferred listening position, or a major change in the room’s furnishings (such as the addition of thick carpeting or plush furniture) that might require different settings. To enter the settings to the receiver’s memory and return to the

MASTER MENU,

make sure that YES appears at the SAVE SETTINGS line, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fso that the on-screen cursor is

pointing to RETURN TO MAIN MENU and press the

Set

Button H

NOTE: If you wish to check the test results before exiting the

EzSet/EQ menu, press the

‹/›

Navigation Buttons F so that

the on-screen cursor is at the second line of the menu listings, and then press the

‹/›

Navigation Buttons F to scroll through the

list of speaker positions. The data on each line will also be entered into the listings on the individual SPEAKER SETUP, DELAY ADJUST and CHANNEL ADJUST menus once you exit EzSet/EQ.

If the tests to any of those 3-channel pairs indicates that one, but not both, of the speakers in the pair is present, the menu will show

NONE next to the speaker position where the tests did not report

back that a speaker is present. Should this message appear, make note of the suspect speaker location, exit all menus and turn the receiver off. Check all speaker wire connections and then rerun EzSet/EQ.

When you have successfully completed the EzSet/EQ process and made any needed adjustments to the input and surround mode configurations, your receiver is ready for use. If you do not wish to make any manual adjustments to the settings, you may skip the rest of this section and proceed to the

Main Room Operation

section of this manual to learn how to operate the AVR21EN, although we recommend that you first record your system’s settings using the worksheets in the

Appendix, in case the settings need

to be reentered due to a power loss or for some other reason. For those situations where you may wish to make a change to the settings entered by EzSet/EQ, follow the instructions on the following pages.

SPEAKER SETUP

This menu tells the AVR21EN which type of speakers are in use. This is important, as it adjusts the settings that decide whether your system will use the “5-channel” or “6-channel/7-channel” mode, as well as determining which speakers receive low-frequency (bass) information.

For each of these settings, use the LARGE setting if the speakers for a particular position are traditional full-range loudspeakers. Use the SMALL setting for smaller, frequency-limited satellite speakers that do not reproduce sounds below 200Hz. Note that when “small” speakers are used, a subwoofer is required to reproduce low-frequency sounds. Remember that the “large” and “small” descriptions do not refer to the actual physical size of the speakers, but to their ability to reproduce low-frequency sounds. If you are in doubt as to which category describes your speakers, consult the specifications in the speakers’ owner’s manual.

This menu screen also allows you to enter the settings for the AVR21EN’s Quadruple Crossover feature, which allows a different crossover point to be used for the front left/right, center, surround and surround back speakers. In systems where full-range or tower speakers are used for the front soundstage or where different brands or models are in use at the various speaker positions, this feature allows you to customize the bass management and redirection circuits with a precision not previously possible.

It is easiest to enter the proper settings for the speaker setup through the

SPEAKERS menu (

Figure 47). If that menu is not

already on screen from prior adjustments, bring up the MAIN MENU, and then press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the

cursor is on the MAIN ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button

. To bring up the SPEAKERS menu, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor next to SPEAKERS. In the

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO ? screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to YES. Press the Set Button H to bring up the SPEAKERS menu (Figure 47).

Figure 47.

Speakers Menu

* * SPEAKERS * *

EzSet ACTIVATE: NO CONFIG AND BASS MGR CROSSOVERS DISTANCES LEVELS

DCDi INTERPOLATION: ON

BACK TO SOURCES

FILM MODE DETECT: ON

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 2 BACK TO SOURCES

System Setup

When NONE is selected, no signals will be sent to the center channel output. The receiver will operate in a “phantom” center channel mode and center channel information will be sent to the left and right front channel outputs.

When you have completed your selection for the center channel, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to SIDE

SURROUND.

Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the option that

best describes the surround speakers in your system based on the definitions shown on this page.

When SMALL is selected, low-frequency surround channel sounds will be sent to the subwoofer output only. If you choose this option and there is no subwoofer connected, you will not hear any low-frequency sounds from the surround channels.

When LARGE is selected, a full-range output will be sent to the surround channel outputs, and NO surround channel signals will be sent to the subwoofer.

When NONE is selected, surround sound information will be split between the front left/right outputs. For optimal performance with no surround speakers, use the Dolby Virtual Speaker mode.

When you have completed your selections for the main surround channels, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor to BACK SURROUND.

Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F on the remote to select the

option that best describes the speakers in use at the left and right back surround positions.

When NONE is selected, this indicates that the System Configuration has been set to the 5.1-channel mode. Return to MAIN ROOM SETUP to change the setting if this is not the correct speaker configuration.

When SMALL is selected, the system will adjust so that the full complement of 6.1/7.1 modes is available, and low-frequency information below the crossover point will be sent to the subwoofer output. If you choose this option and there is no subwoofer connected, you will not hear any low-frequency sounds from the surround back channels.

When LARGE is selected, the system will adjust so that the full complement of 6.1/7.1 surround processing/decoding modes is available, and a full-range signal will be sent to the surround back channels, with no low-frequency information sent to the subwoofer output.

When you have completed your selection for the surround back channels, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor to SUBWOOFER.

Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the option that

best describes your system.

The choices available for the subwoofer position will depend on the settings for the other speakers, particularly the front left/right positions.

If the front left/right speakers are set to SMALL, the subwoofer will automatically be set to SUB, which is the “on” position.

EzSet/EQ ACTIVATE:

To configure system speaker settings, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor next to CONFIG AND BASS

MGR. Press the

Set Button H. The SPEAKER CONFIGURA-

TION AND BASS MANAGER screen will appear (

Figure 48).

Figure 48.

Speaker Configuration Screen

Speaker Configuration and Bass Management

Begin the speaker setup process by making certain that the cursor is pointing at the FRONT line, which sets the configuration for the front left and right speakers. If you wish to make a change to the front speakers’ configuration, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button

so that either LARGE or SMALL appears, matching the appro-

priate description from the definitions shown above.

When SMALL is selected, low-frequency sounds will be sent only to the subwoofer output. If you choose this option and no subwoofer is connected, you will not hear any low-frequency sounds from the front channels.

When LARGE is selected, a full-range output will be sent to the front left and front right outputs. Depending on the choice made in the SUBWOOFER line in this menu, bass and/or LFE information may also be directed to the subwoofer.

When you have completed your selection for the front channels, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to CENTER.

Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F on the remote to select

the option that best describes your system, based on the speaker definitions shown below.

When SMALL is selected, low-frequency center channel sounds will be sent only to the subwoofer output. If you choose this option and no subwoofer is connected, you will not hear low-frequency sounds from the center channel.

When LARGE is selected, a full-range output will be sent to the center speaker output, and NO center channel signal will be sent to the subwoofer output.

NOTE: If you choose Logic 7 as the surround mode for the particular

input source for which you are configuring your speakers, the AVR21EN will not make the LARGE option available for the center speaker. This is due to the requirements of Logic 7 processing, and does not indicate a problem with your receiver.

System Setup

* * SPEAKERS * *

EzSet ACTIVATE: NO CONFIG AND BASS MGR CROSSOVERS DISTANCES LEVELS

DCDi INTERPOLATION: ON FILM MODE DETECT: ON

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

GO TO VIDEO SETTINGS 2 BACK TO SOURCES

BACK TO SOURCES

If the front left/right speakers are set to LARGE, three options are available:

I If no subwoofer is connected to the AVR21EN, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F until NONE appears. With this option,

all bass information will be routed to the front left/right “main” speakers.

I If a subwoofer is connected to the AVR21EN, you have the

option to have the front left/right main speakers reproduce bass frequencies at all times, and have the subwoofer operate only when the AVR21EN is being used with a digital source that contains a dedicated low-frequency effects, or LFE, soundtrack. This allows you to use both your main and subwoofer speakers to take advantage of the special bass sounds created for some movies. Press

‹/›

Navigation Button F until SUB (LFE)

appears.

I If a subwoofer is connected and you wish to use it for bass

reproduction in conjunction with the main front left/right speakers, regardless of the type of program source or surround mode you are listening to, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F

until SUB L/R+LFE appears. When this option is selected, a full-range signal will be sent to the front left/right “main” speakers, and the subwoofer will receive LFE information and the bass frequencies under the selected crossover point.

When all initial speaker “size” settings have been made, you now have the option to take advantage of the AVR21EN’s Quadruple Crossover system, which allows individual crossover settings to be made for each speaker group. The low-frequency crossover point is the frequency below which the signal will be redirected to the subwoofer and is set by the design of your speakers. Depending on the design and driver complement of your speakers, it is usually the lowest possible frequency the speaker is capable of reproducing.

Before making any changes to the settings for the crossover point, we suggest that you find the crossover point for the speakers in each of the four groupings, front left/right, center front, surround and surround back, by looking at the specifications page of each speaker’s owner’s manual, by getting that information from the manufacturer’s Web site, or by contacting your manufacturer’s customer service department. You will need this figure to accurately configure the next group of settings.

NOTE: When any speaker group other than the front left/right

speakers is set to LARGE, the crossover may not be adjusted, as the feed will be full-range, with no sound being derived for the subwoofer from that position.

The factory default setting for all speaker positions is 100Hz. If that setting is acceptable for all channels, then no adjustments are needed and you may skip this section. However, should you wish to change one of the settings, please proceed by pressing the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor moves to the BACK

TO SPEAKERS MENU line. Press the

Set Button H. The

SPEAKERS setup screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor next to CROSSOVERS. Press the

Set Button H. The SPEAKER CROSSOVERS screen will

appear (

Figure 49).

Figure 49.

Speaker Crossover Setup Screen

Speaker Crossovers

To change the setting for any of the four speaker groups, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to the

speaker group where you wish to make a change and then press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F until the desired setting appears.

The available choices for low-frequency information to be sent to the subwoofer, rather than to the main speaker channel, are 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz and 200Hz. Pick the choice that is identical to the information for the speakers, or if an exact match is not possible, pick the closest choice that is ABOVE the speaker’s low-frequency limit, to avoid the creation of a low-frequency “hole” where your system will have no bass information.

The setting for the crossover point for the SUBWOOFER channel, which is created to provide specific low-frequency information in many movies with digital soundtracks, may be set to match the crossover for any of the four speaker groups. Since the crossover point commonly used in the creation of the SUBWOOFER channel is 120Hz, we recommend that you select the speaker group whose crossover point is closest to 120Hz. To do this, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to the

SUBWOOFER line, and then press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F

until the name of the speaker group with the desired crossover frequency appears. Of course, you may also experiment with different settings to find the one that provides the smoothest and most complete bass response in your particular listening environment.

When all crossover settings have been made, or in those cases where none are needed, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

to move the cursor next to BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU and press the

Set Button H. The SPEAKERS menu will appear.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to CONFIG AND BASS MGR and press the

Set Button H.

The SPEAKER CONFIGURATION AND BASS MANAGER setup screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is next to the BASS MGR line to make the final setting on this menu.

This setting allows you to use the same speaker configuration and crossover settings for all inputs, or to have different settings for each input. In most cases, the factory default setting of GLOBAL will be appropriate, as most systems do not need individual speaker

* SPEAKER CROSSOVERS *

FRONT : 100Hz CENTER: 100Hz SIDE SURROUND: 100Hz BACK SURROUND: 100Hz SUBWOOFER: LEFT/RIGHT RESET THESE SETTINGS?

BACK TO SOURCES

RESET THESE SETTINGS?

BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU

BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU BACK TO SOURCES

System Setup

To set the delay time, the SPEAKER DISTANCES screen (

Figure 50) should be open. To select that menu, press the Menu

Button 

on the remote. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F

until the on-screen cursor is pointing at the MAIN ROOM SETUP line and press the

Set Button H. In MAIN ROOM SETUP, press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the on-screen cursor is point-

ing at the SPEAKERS line and press the

Set Button H. In the

ARE YOU SURE ? screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

until the on-screen cursor is pointing at YES and press the Set

Button H

. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F until the

on-screen cursor is pointing at the DISTANCES line and press the

Set Button H to call up the menu.

Figure 50.

Speaker Distances (Delay) Setup Screen

Once the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu is on your screen, note that the default for distance settings is in feet. If your measurements are in feet, proceed to the next step; if your measurements are made in meters, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until

the on-screen cursor is at the UNIT OF MEASURE line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F so that METER is highlighted.

When the change in measurement units is made, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to return the cursor to FRONT.

With the on-screen cursor pointing to FRONT, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F until the distance from the front speakers

to the preferred listening position is entered. Next, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to CENTER and use

the

‹/›

Navigation Button F again to enter the distance from

the main listening position to the center speaker. Repeat the procedure for all active speaker positions, first using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to change to the next position, and then

using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to change the setting.

Speaker Levels

The Speaker Levels may be adjusted using the full-OSD on-screen menu system. First, set the volume to a comfortable listening level using the

Volume Control NJ. Press the AVR

Button 4

on the remote, then, press the MENU Button  to

bring up the MAIN MENU. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

until the on-screen cursor is next to the MAIN ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

so the cursor is next to SPEAKERS. Press the Set Button H.

In the speakers ARE YOU SURE ? screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the on-screen cursor so

that it is next to YES. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so the cursor is next to LEVELS.

Press the

Set Button H.

* SPEAKER DISTANCES *

FRONT: 10 ft CENTER: 13 ft SIDE SURROUND: 12 ft BACK SURROUND: 10 ft UNIT OF MEASURE: FEET RESET THESE SETTINGS?

BACK TO SOURCES

RESET THESE SETTINGS?

BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU

BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU BACK TO SOURCES

settings. However, when full-range front speakers are used for both movies and music, different bass management settings may be used when listening to music through a CD player, as opposed to a movie from a DVD player, VCR or cable/satellite set-top.

To customize the speaker-size configurations to each input, at the SPEAKER CONFIGURATION AND BASS MANAGER screen press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

the BASS MGR line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F so that

INDEPENDENT appears. When this choice is entered by exiting the menu, the settings just entered will apply to the current input ONLY, and you will need to press the

Exit Button G on the

remote, select another input and then return to this menu page to change the settings for the next input. Repeat the procedure for any input where you wish to have a different set of speaker configuration and crossover settings.

NOTE: The INDEPENDENT feature allows you to select a different

speaker size configuration (Large, Small or None, as appropriate) for each input source. However, the individual crossover point setting may only be set once, and the selection made during the initial setup will be used for all inputs, regardless of any changes made to the “Large” or “Small” settings for the speaker groups attached to any input. The reason is that while you may prefer different settings for the bass redirection (that is, which signals go to the subwoofer or the speaker group), the actual crossover point remains the same since the actual loudspeakers themselves remain the same, regardless of any other setting.

When all speaker selections have been made, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to DISTANCES

to “balance” listening and speaker position or BACK TO MAIN ROOM to make other selections, and then press the

Set Button

. To exit setup, press the Exit Button G on the remote.

Speaker Distances (Delay)

Due to the different distances between the listening position and each speaker position, the amount of time it takes for sound to reach your ears from each channel is different. You may compensate for this difference through the use of the delay settings to adjust the timing for the speaker placement and acoustic conditions in your listening room or home theater.

The AVR21EN’s advanced software enables you to quickly and easily set delay times without the need to calculate them using a complicated formula. Instead, all you need to do is measure the approximate distance between your listening position and each of the speakers in your system. When you enter those distances into the AVR’s memory as shown below, the AVR’s microprocessor does the rest of the work, calculating the proper delay time. The measurements need not be accurate to the inch, as the system is designed to accommodate a typical listening area rather than require the precise measurement to one “sweet spot” position.

In addition to adjusting the delay time for each individual speaker position, the AVR21EN is among the few receivers that allows you to adjust the delay for the combined output of all speakers as a group. This feature is called Lip Sync; it allows you to compensate for delays to the video image that may be caused by the processing in products such as digital video displays, video scalers, digital cable or satellite systems, or personal video recorders. With proper adjustment of the setting for Lip Sync, you can eliminate potential differences between the video image and the corresponding audio signal that may be caused by digital video applications.

System Setup

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so the cursor is next to

TEST TONE. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

so that OFF is highlighted. This will turn off the test

tone and allow you to use your external test disc or other source material as the reference. Then, use the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to select the channels to be adjusted. At each channel posi-

tion, use the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to change the output

level. Remember, the goal is to have the output level at each channel equal when heard at the listening position.

If you wish to reset all the levels to their original factory default of 0dB offset, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the

on-screen cursor is next to the RESET THESE SETTINGS ? line and press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

so that the cursor is next to YES. Press the Set

Button H

. After the levels are reset, resume the procedure outlined above to reset the levels to the desired settings. When all adjustments are done, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to

move the on-screen cursor so that it is next to BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU and then press the

Set Button H. If you wish to go back

to the Main Room menu to make other adjustments, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so the cursor is next to BACK TO

MAIN ROOM. Press the

Set Button H.

The speaker levels may also be set using the front-panel controls. Once the reference level has been set, on the AVR front panel, press the

Channel Select Button R and FRONT L LEVEL

will appear in the AVR Lower Display Line . To change the level, first press the

Set Button 7, and then use the

‹/›

Mode

Adjust Buttons 68

to raise or lower the level. DO NOT use the

volume control, as this will alter the reference setting.

Once the change has been made, press the

Set Button 7 and

then press the

‹/›

Mode Adjust Buttons 68 to select the next

output-channel location that you wish to adjust. To adjust the subwoofer level, press the

‹/›

Mode Adjust Buttons 68 until

WOOFER LEVEL appears in the Lower Display Line  or

on-screen display.

NOTE: Speaker configuration and source

configuration must be set to an appropriate surround mode to be able to make adjustments to the subwoofer and specific surround speakers.

Repeat the procedure as needed, until all channels requiring adjustment have been set. When all adjustments have been made and no further adjustments are made for 5 seconds, the AVR21EN will return to normal operational.

Lip Sync

When a digital video source or a digital video display causes the video and audio signals to be out of sync, you may use the Lip Sync Adjust feature to delay the audio signal as it is sent to all channels (as opposed to the individual channels) so that the picture and sound are brought back into sync. We recommend that this adjustment be made using the direct-access controls on the remote, as shown below. That enables you to see the image while making the adjustment. However, you may also adjust it here using the menu system.

To adjust the Lip Sync delay, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointing to LIP SYNC in MAIN ROOM SETUP; then press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to delay the

sound sufficiently so that it matches the on-screen video.

Note that the Lip Sync delay setting is common to all sources. Some adjustments may need to be made when switching between sources, given different settings and performance characteristics of different devices.

REC Out

The REC OUT line gives you the opportunity to select which type of audio signal is directed to the Record Output Jacks associated with

VR 4, and AUX 7. The default setting is ANALOG, which will

send the analog signal from any source to all three sets of analog record outputs.

In cases in which you wish to have the output of a digital source selected as the record output feed, with the cursor next to REC OUT , press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F so that DSP

DOWNMIX appears. When this indication is shown, the AVR will

feed a downmixed, analog version of a Dolby Digital- or DTSencoded signal to the Record Output jacks associated with

VR 4,

AUX 7 and the Game/Cam IJLM AVR front-panel jacks

(when they are configured as outputs). This enables you to make an analog recording (where permitted by copyright laws) of the soundtrack from a digital source.

As a reminder, to ensure that a signal feed is always available to the Record Output jacks, we recommend that an analog connection be made as a fallback for all digital sources. This is key with sources such as cable set-tops to ensure that a record feed will continue in the event that the digital audio stream is not available when channels are changed.

When all needed adjustments have been made, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to VIDEO

MONITOR SETTINGS, to make additional Main Room

adjustments, or BACK TO MAIN MENU to continue with the system configuration, or press the

Exit Button G on

the remote to return to operational mode.

Video Monitor Settings

The VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS are global, rather than input-dependent, as there is only one Main Room display connected to the AVR. The settings here are primarily changes to the video enhancement level and aspect ratio for a specific type of device, and defaults were selected after testing on a wide range of product brands. To change this setting, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

so that the on-screen cursor is pointing to VIDEO

MONITOR SETTINGS and then press the

Set Button H. The

VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS screen will appear (

Figure 51).

Figure 51.

Video Monitor Settings Screen

* VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS *

SCREEN TYPE: PLASMA TEST VIDEO: OFF OUT ASPECT RATIO: 16:9 COMPONENT OUT: HIGH DEF HDMI ENHANCEMENT: STD (COMPONENT VIDEO ON)

BACK TO SOURCES

BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

System Setup

Ramp/Square: This complex pattern uses a variety of fixed

and pulsating gray-scale tests to test different aspects of the 3/2 pull-down edit detection and other aspects of the processor and interpolation software.

Out Aspect Ratio

This setting selects between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio, as described in

Screen Type, above. To set OUT ASPECT RATIO, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the cursor is positioned next to

OUT ASPECT RATIO. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to

select the appropriate setting.

Component Out

With the cursor positioned next to the COMPONENT OUT line, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to choose 1080i for high

definition (any device capable of accepting an input signal of 480p or higher) or 480i for a standard-resolution video display.

HDMI Enhancement

This setting allows connection and use of the HDMI Output  on the AVR rear panel with an HDMI-capable HD Video Display. HDMI transfers uncompressed digital video signals to similarly capable devices for the best quality video image. Selecting YES will disable the

Monitor Component Video Output . (Conversely,

selecting NO disables the

HDMI OUT .) The Monitor Component

Video Output and HDMI Output cannot be used simultaneously. To activate the HDMI Output, with the cursor next to HDMI ENHANCEMENT, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select

YES. If using the Monitor Component Video Output, select NO.

When all needed adjustments have been made, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to BACK TO

MAIN ROOM to continue with the system configuration and press

the

Set Button H or press the Exit Button G to return to

operational mode.

Advanced Settings

The AVR21EN is equipped with a number of advanced features that add extra flexibility to the unit’s operation. While it is not necessary to use these features to operate the unit, they provide additional options that you may wish to use.

Front-Panel Timeout

In normal operation, the AVR21EN front-panel displays and indicators remain on at full-brightness. As an option, you may dim them or turn them off. As an additional option, you may also set the AVR so that the displays appear whenever a button is pressed on the front panel or remote, but then fade out after a set period of time.

To set front-panel time-out, press the

Menu Button  on the

remote to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the MAIN

ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

ADVANCED line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed to the FRNT

PANEL TIMEOUT line. Next, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button

to set the amount of time after which you wish the displays to

fade out after a button is pressed. Range: 3–9 seconds, OFF.

Once this time is set and the unit is returned to normal operation, the displays will remain on for the time period selected whenever

Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select from among the

options shown for the type of display that is connected to the AVR21EN. The options are:

Screen Type

CRT: This setting is optimized for use with displays that use

cathode ray tubes (CRTs) to display images. For the purposes of this setting, it does not matter whether the display is a single tube, direct view CRT television or a three-tube front or rear projector. The default aspect ratio is 4:3, but you may change that setting, if desired, in the VIDEO MONITOR SETTINGS screen.

Project: This setting is optimized for front- or rear-screen projectors,

regardless of the imaging technology used, that are set to display a standard 4:3 aspect ratio. If your projection display has a 16:9 aspect ratio, select DLP or LCD as a display-type option, or for CRT-based projectors that use a 16:9 screen, select the CRT option and then change the OUT ASPECT RATIO setting to 16:9.

Plasma: This setting is optimized for plasma displays, regardless of

whether they are fully high-definition-capable or “ED” displays that are HD-compatible.

DLP: This setting is optimized for use with projectors that use light

engines with Texas Instruments DLP

™

technology. For the purposes of this setting, it does not matter whether the display uses one or three chips, or whether the display is a front- or rear-projection system. The default aspect ratio is 16:9, but you may change that setting, if desired, by changing the OUT ASPECT RATIO setting.

LCD: This setting is optimized for use with displays that use liquid

crystal display (LCD) technology. For the purposes of this setting, it does not matter whether the display is a direct-view LCD flat panel, or a front- or rear-projection system using three LCDs as its light engine. The default aspect ratio is 16:9, but you may change that setting, if desired, by changing the OUT ASPECT RATIO setting.

Test Video

The test signals that are called up on this line are designed for use in factory setup of the AVR21EN’s video processing circuit and they are not designed for user adjustment of any controls on your video sources, on your video display or on the AVR21EN itself. You may bypass this setting line unless you wish to view the signals, but remember that they are not designed for any consumer use.

To view the test signals, with the on-screen cursor next to the TEST VIDEO line, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to

select one of the test signals described below, and then press the

Set Button H to activate the test signal. The test signal will

remain on the screen for the length of time selected in the ADVANCED SETTINGS menu for the on-screen display, as explained in

Advanced Settings/Main Menu Timeout. The

four test signals are:

Color Bars: These are a variation of traditional split-field color

bars used to check the internal settings for luminance/chrominance voltage levels, with respect to the eight basic colors.

Triangle Fixed: This test signal puts two opposing triangles

on screen, with a black triangle on the right and a white triangle on the left, to test aspects of the pull-down logic software.

Triangle Flashing: This test signal also puts two opposing black

and white triangles on the screen, but it flashes them at a high frame rate, to test the 3/2 pull-down edit detection and other aspects of the processor and interpolation software.

System Setup

a button is pressed on the front panel or remote. After that time, they will gradually fade out, with the exception of the LED in the

Power Button 1, which remains on to remind you that the AVR is

turned on.

Front-Panel Brightness

The AVR21EN’s front-panel displays and indicators are set at a default brightness level that is sufficient for viewing in a normally lit room. However, you may wish to occasionally lower the brightness of the display, or turn it off completely.

To set front-panel brightness, press the

Menu Button  on

the remote to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

MAIN ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. Press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the ADVANCED line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

FRNT PNL BRGHTNSS line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button

to select FULL, HALF or OFF. The AVR will operate at this

setting until the power is turned OFF (standby). When the AVR is powered up, the displays and indicators will light at full-brightness.

NOTE: When the display has been turned off, the green power

indicator in the

Power Button 1 will remain on to show that

the AVR is powered up.

Power-On Volume

As is the case with most audio/video receivers, when the AVR21EN is turned on, it will always return to the volume setting in effect when the unit was turned off. However, you may prefer to have the AVR21EN always turn on at a specific setting, regardless of what was last in use when the unit was turned off. To change the default condition so that the same volume level is always used at turn-on, you will need to make an adjustment in the

ADVANCED menu.

To set Power-On Volume, press the

Menu Button  on the

remote to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed to the

MAIN ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed to

the ADVANCED line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed to the POWER

ON VOLUME line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select

OFF or ON. With OFF selected, the AVR will always turn on to the volume level set when the unit was last turned off. With ON selected, the AVR will always turn on to the Power-On Volume level.

To set the Power-On Volume level, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

so that the cursor is pointed to the POWER ON VOL

LVL line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the

desired turn-on level. Range: –50dB to –10dB. Default: –50dB. This setting may NOT be made with the regular volume controls.

NOTE: Since the setting for the turn-on volume cannot be heard

while the setting is being made, you may wish to determine the setting before making the adjustment. To do this, listen to any source and adjust the volume to the desired level using the regular

Volume Controls NJ. When the desired volume level to be

used at turn-on is reached, make a note of the setting as it appears in the lower third of the video screen or in the

Lower Display Line



on the AVR’s front panel. (A typical volume level will appear as

a negative number such as –25dB.) When making the adjustment,

use the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to enter this setting.

Unlike some of the other adjustments in this menu, the turn-on volume default will remain in effect until it is changed or turned off in this menu, even when the unit is turned off.

On-Screen Status

The semi-OSD system places two-line messages at bottom of the video display screen whenever the Volume, Input Source, Surround Mode, Tuner Frequency or any of the configuration settings are changed. The semi-OSD system is helpful in that it enables you to have feedback on any control changes or remote commands using the video display when it is difficult to view the AVR’s front-panel display. However, you may prefer to turn these displays off permanently. You may also want to adjust the length of time the displays remain on the screen. Both of those options are possible with the AVR21EN.

To set On-Screen Status, press the

Menu Button  to bring the

MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

 so that the cursor is

pointed at the MAIN ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button

. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is

pointed at the ADVANCED line. Press the

Set Button H. Press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at

the ON SCREEN STATUS line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

to select the duration of this setting. Select one of

these options:

I To keep the semi-OSD system activated, but to adjust the

length of time the displays remain on the screen, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F until the desired time-out is shown.

The default setting is 3 seconds.

I To turn the semi-OSD system off so that it does not appear at

any time, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F so that OFF is

shown on the right side of the line.

Main Menu Time-Out

The Full-OSD menu system is used to simplify the setup and adjustment of the AVR21EN by using a series of on-screen menus. The factory default setting for these menus leaves them on the screen for 30 seconds after a period of inactivity before they disappear from the screen (time-out). Time-out is a safety measure to prevent image retention (burn-in) of the menu text your monitor or projector, which might happen if the menus were left on indefinitely. However, you may prefer a different time period before the on-screen display disappears.

To set Main Menu time-out, press the

Menu Button  on

the remote to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

MAIN ROOM SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. Press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the ADVANCED line. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

MAIN MENU TIMEOUT line. Next, press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

until the desired time is displayed in seconds. Unlike most of the other options in this menu, this is a permanent setting change, and the Time Out entry will remain in effect until it is changed, even if the unit is turned off.

System Setup

Figure 52.

Remote Control Setup 1 Screen

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the source to be configured. (For this example, Disc 1 will be used.) Press the

Set Button H. The DISC 1 CONTROL

SETUP screen will appear (

Figure 53).

Figure 53.

Source Control Setup Screen

Carrier

With the cursor positioned next to CARRIER, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to select the proper setting. Press the Set Button H. NOTE: Most IR remotes used with common

source components will have a carrier, so YES should be selected as a first test. Some cable box remotes do not use a carrier, so if the CARRIER: YES setting doesn’t work, try changing the setting to NO.

There are two options for programming IR codes:

PROGRAM:

This option uses a setup screen to configure IR commands from the onboard IR code library. This method will be effective for programming most devices.

LEARN: This option allows individual buttons to be programmed

for specific IR codes, as desired, from other IR remotes. This method would typically be used to add a particular command that is not included in the onboard library.

Program Code

With the cursor next to PROGRAM CODE, press the Set Button

. The DISC 1 CODE PROGRAM screen will appear.

* DISC 1 CONTROL SETUP *

CARRIER: YES PROGRAM CODE LEARN CODE ON-OFF COMM: SPS

ON-OFF COMM: SPS UNTIL SOURCE TURNS OFF

BACK TO SOURCES

UNIT POWERED OFF? YES

BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

NOTE: TURN ON SOURCE

* REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 *

DISC 1 DISC 2 DISC 3 VR CABLE/SAT AV/AUX

BACK TO SOURCES

HDMI AUDIO: YES

GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2 BACK TO MAIN ROOM

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

If you wish to make other adjustments, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

until the on-screen cursor is next to the desired setting

or the BACK TO MAIN ROOM SETUP line, and press the

Set Button H. If you have no other adjustments to make,

press the

Exit Button G to exit the menu system and return

to operational mode.

Remote Control Setup

NOTE: Before proceeding in this section, all source components

connected to the rear panel of the AVR21EN MUST have IR emitters attached to their IR eyes and the emitters must be connected to the appropriate AVR rear panel

Control Out Jacks  to complete

this setup. Additionally, any devices utilizing the DVD Changer Interface terminals must also have an IR emitter connected to the appropriate

Control Out Jack . The DVD Changer Interface only

provides Disc and Track data for display on the multiroom keypads.

The AVR21EN utilizes a unique control system in which the external sources connected to the AVR rear panel (Disc 1, Disc 2, Disc 3, AUX, VR, Cable/Sat) are not controlled directly from the AVR21ENR1 Main Room remote. Instead, the remote outputs proprietary Audioaccess IR commands that are recognized by the AVR21EN and converted to the specific manufacturer’s control codes for the external sources.

This section of the OSD setup configures IR control of the devices controlled via the AVR21EN rear-panel

Control Out Jacks 

specifically. Two other devices, TV and Game/Cam, can be controlled directly from the AVR21ENR1 Main Room remote and are set up in the remote itself.

The AVR21EN outputs the IR commands from its rear-panel

Control Out Jacks  via IR emitters. Emitters are tiny LEDs that

get attached to the front panels of external, common-source components, over the IR eyes, and “flash” the specific control codes for the various devices, as prompted by the AVR.

This method allows the AVR to manage source IR control beyond regular device control for Play, Stop, etc. It provides additional system capabilities for functions such as power management, to govern the on/off status of the sources and keep them in sync with the system. It also allows selective control of multiple same-brand, same-model components (multiple DVD players, cable/sat receivers, etc) with what is called IR routing. This method of setting up each source’s control codes also allows the multiroom section of the system control the common-source components from remote locations.

To configure the AVR21EN for source IR control, press the

Button 

to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed to the

REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H.

The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 screen will appear (

Figure 52).

System Setup

Manual Program

Selecting this mode will allow you to manually select the type of device (DVD, Sat, etc.), brand (Sony, Toshiba, etc.) and code group for a specific device. This method is more direct and will be a little faster than the automatic mode, which will search the entire library for codes.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the

MANUAL line. Press the

Set Button H. The DISC 1

MANUAL PROG

screen will appear (

Figure 54). Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at SOURCE

TYPE

Figure 54.

IR Manual Program Screen

Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the source type:

DVD or CD. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor next to BRAND. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to

select the appropriate brand.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

TRY CODES. With the AVR21ENR1 Main Room remote pointing toward the AVR front panel, slowly press the

Alphanumeric

Buttons 

, through the range indicated on screen, until the unit

being configured turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to YES. This will

“save” this code group for control of the source selected.

Press the

Exit Button G to exit the Menu. Press the appropriate

Input Selector 3 on the AVR21ENR1 remote to select the source

and then press various control buttons (Play, Stop, Track, numeric functions, etc.) to confirm IR codes. If some commands are missing (not included in the library), they can be added individually by using the LEARN CODE option in CONTROL SETUP. If only a few IR codes need to be added to the setup as configured using the internal IR code library, proceed to LEARN CODE. If no code group was found within a specific brand for a specific device, follow the instructions in AUTOMATIC PROGRAM.

If the appropriate code group has been configured, return to the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP 1 screen to configure the next source’s IR codes. Repeat until all sources are set up for IR control.

Automatic Program

The Automatic Program option will check all codes available for a specific type of device (DVD, Sat, etc.) in the onboard IR Code Library to try to match a set of commands with a particular device.

To open the AUTOMATIC CODE PROGRAM screen, press the

Menu Button  to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at

the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H.

The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

source to be configured (for example, Disc 1 will be used). Press the

Set Button H. The DISC 1 CONTROL SETUP screen will

appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is

pointed at the PROGRAM CODE line. Press the

Set Button H.

The DISC 1 CODE PROGRAM screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

AUTOMATIC line. Press the

Set Button H. The DISC 1

AUTO PROGRAM screen will appear (

Figure 55).

Figure 55.

Source Auto Program Screen

With the cursor pointed at the SOURCE line, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the type of source. (The setup will

confine the options to source types relevant to the selected input (Disc 1 = DVD; CD; VR = VCR; TIVO; DVDR, etc.). Press the

Set

Button H

to select the source type. Press ¤to move the cursor

next to TRY CODES. Repeatedly press the

‹or›

Navigation

Button F

to test all selected device type commands until the unit

turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

Navigation Button

to move the cursor next to YES. Press the Set Button H to

“save” the code group.

Press the

Exit Button G to exit the menu. Press the appropriate

Input Selector 3 on the AVR21ENR1 remote to select the source

and then press various control buttons (Play, Stop, Track, numeric functions, etc.) to confirm IR codes. If some commands are missing (not included in the library) or if no proper code group was found, they can be added individually by using the LEARN CODE option in CONTROL SETUP.

If the appropriate code group has been configured, return to the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP 1 screen to configure the next source’s IR codes. Repeat until all sources are set up for IR control.

Learn Code

If specific commands are missing from Program Setup (not included in the library), if no proper code group was found or if a special command is required, they can be added individually by using the LEARN CODE option in CONTROL SETUP.

To open the LEARN CODE screen, press the

Menu Button 

on the remote to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

* DISC 1 AUTO PROGRAM *

CARRIER: NO

SOURCE: DVD TRY CODES: PRESS L,R ARROWS ON REMOTE UNTIL SOURCE POWERS OFF UNIT POWERED OFF?F

BACK TO SOURCES

YES

CONN RS232 (IF APPL) AND

BACK TO D1 CODE PROG

BACK TO D1 CNTL SETUP

NOTE: TURN ON SOURCE

System Setup

* DISC 1 MANUAL PROG * NOTE: TURN ON SOURCE SOURCE TYPE: DVD

BRAND: SONY INVERT CODE: YES TRY CODES: PRESS NUMS 1 THROUGH 7 ON REMOTE UNTIL SOURCE TURNS OFF UNIT POWERED OFF? YES BACK TO D1 CODE PROG

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

BACK TO SOURCES

NOTE: The SPF Jacks  are 12VDC inputs that can be used with

the Audioaccess SPF Source Power Flag sensor, or other sensing devices, that output 12VDC when the device being sensed is on and 0V DC when the device is off.

SEND: If SEND is selected, the AVR will always send a power

command to a source component when the AVR is turned on and again when the AVR is turned off.

Don’t Send: When DON T SEND is selected, the AVR will never

issue power commands to a source component. The device will need to be turned on and off manually or with some other method.

To configure SPF, press the

Menu Button  to bring the MAIN

MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 screen

will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cur-

sor is pointed to the source to be configured (for example Disc 1 will be used). Press the

Set Button H. The DISC 1 CONTROL

SETUP screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointed to the ON-OFF COMM line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select SPF if an SPF or other 12V

sensor is being used to track a source’s ON/OFF status.

To test, turn both the source and AVR OFF. Turn on the AVR. The source component should turn on. Turn the AVR OFF. The source component should turn OFF.

Home Theater Master Control

The AVR21ENR1 remote ON/OFF buttons have two selectable modes when used after pressing the TV button. These modes are enabled/disabled in the remote menu under HT MASTER ON/OFF (HT is an abbreviation for Home Theater). See

Programming the AVR21ENR1 Remote Control/HT Master

for additional information.

HT Master On/Off Disabled: In this mode, after pressing the

remote

TV Button 5, the remote ON/OFF Buttons 01 will

turn the Main Room Video Display ON or OFF. All other buttons will send TV control functions as configured (volume up/down, numeric commands, etc.). In this mode, the TV commands are configured in the remote and are sent from the remote directly to the TV. This mode does not require any configuration in this setup, so if this is how you are going to control your Main Room components, you may skip this section.

HT Master On/Off Enabled: In this mode, after pressing the

remote

TV Button 5, the remote On Button 1 can send

IR commands, via the

Control Out All Jack , to turn on the

Main Room video display, control the lights and drop a screen or raise a lift. A press of the remote

OFF Button 0 would reverse

the process. The IR commands are configured in the REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 menu.

NOTE: To configure IR commands for HT

MASTER ON/OFF ENABLED, an IR emitter must be connected to the

Control Out All Jack  on the AVR rear panel and attached to

the device being controlled (TV/projector, screen, lights, curtain) over the IR eye on that device. If more than one emitter is to be used, connect the

Control Out All Jack  to the IR In on an

amplified IR connecting block and connect the additional emitter.

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H.

The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 screen will appear.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the source to be configured (for example, Disc 1 will be used). Press the

Set Button H. The DISC 1 CNTL SETUP screen

will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the

cursor is pointed at the LEARN CODE line. Press the

Set Button

. The DISC 1 CODE LEARN screen will appear (Figure 56).

Figure 56.

Source Code Learn Screen

1. With the cursor positioned next to USING THE

‹›

KEYS

line, press the

Set Button H. The message USING THE

‹/›

KEYS SELECT FUNCTION TO BE PROG will start to flash, indicating a function can be selected for learning.

2. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to scroll through the

AVR21ENR1 remote buttons available for programming.

3. When the desired function appears, press the

Navigation

Button F

to position the cursor next to POINT ORIGINAL

REM TO AVR DISPLAY PRESS KEY. Press the

Set

Button H

4. The POINT ORIGINAL message will start to flash. Point the

original remote toward the

IR Sensor  in the Information

Display O

on the AVR front panel and press the button with

the original code until the message stops flashing and CODE LEARNED appears on screen.

The cursor will automatically return to the USING THE

‹/›

KEYS

line. Repeat steps above until all individual codes have been learned.

Press the

Exit Button G to exit the menu to test the learned

codes.

Once the appropriate code(s) has/have been learned and tested, return to the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP 1 screen to configure the next source’s IR codes. Repeat until all sources are set up for IR control.

On-Off Command

On-Off Command has three options.

SPF: This setting tells the AVR21EN to look at a specific source’s SPF Flag-In Jack  on the AVR’s rear panel, to determine On/Off

status. This allows the AVR to know when to (or not to) send power commands to a source component when the AVR is turning on or off. It will also have the AVR appropriately send power commands to turn a source component on, when that source is selected, if it had for some reason turned off.

System Setup

To configure IR commands for HT Master:

Press the Menu Button  on the remote to bring the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1

screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen will

appear (

Figure 57).

Figure 57.

Remote Control Setup 2 Screen

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the ASSIGN TRIGGER OUT line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

to select the device to be controlled with a constant

12V DC control voltage.

TRIGGER would typically be used with a TV or projector that can be turned ON/OFF with a 12V DC signal or a motorized screen that will drop when a 12V signal is present and retract when the control voltage is removed. Another possible option is a control voltage to a lighting system that can take a constant 12V DC control signal and convert it to a “movie mode” lighting scene and then restore normal room lighting when the voltage is removed.

NOTE: This function can only be assigned to ONE device. Once

TRIGGER has been assigned to TV/Projector, Screen or Lighting, the Trigger setup option will only appear on the setup page for that device. See

Voltage Control at the end of the TV/Projector,

Screen

and Lighting sections for configuration.

TV/Projector On/Off

To turn the TV/Projector ON/OFF with the AVR, in the REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointed to the TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF line. Press the

Set Button H. The TV/PROJ CONTROL

SETUP screen will appear.

Carrier

With the cursor positioned next to CARRIER, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the proper setting. NOTE: Most IR

remotes used with common-source components will have a carrier, so YES should be selected as a first test. Some cable box remotes do not use a carrier, so if a code setting doesn’t work, try changing this setting.

Invert Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

INVERT CODE. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select

YES/NO. Most devices will be set to NO. Certain devices (Sony S-Link remote control In) will require a YES setting. Try changing this setting if a specific code selection does not work for a given device.

Program Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

to the PROGRAM CODE line. Press the

Set Button H. The

TV/PROJ CODE PROGRAM screen will appear.

TV/Proj Program Code (Manual)

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the MANUAL line. Press the

Set Button H. The TV/PROJ

MANUAL PROG screen will appear. SOURCE TYPE will be fixed

as selected (TV/PROJ).

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to BRAND. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the

appropriate brand.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

TRY CODES. With the AVR21ENR1 Main Room Remote pointing toward the AVR’s front panel, starting with 1, slowly press the numeric buttons through the range indicated on screen, until the unit being configured turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to YES.

Press the

Set Button H. This will “save” this code group for

ON/OFF control of the TV/projector.

If no IR ON/OFF commands were found, see

Automatic and Learn,

below.

If no further programming is required, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operation mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor next to BACK TO T/P CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤Navigation Button F again to

move the cursor next to BACK TO T/P CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The TV/PROJ CONTROL SETUP

screen will appear.

To program SCREEN UP/DOWN, LIGHTING ON/OFF, CURTAIN OPEN/CLOSE, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to move the cursor next to BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP.

Press the

Set Button H. See the Screen Control and Lighting

Control

sections.

TV/Proj Program Code (Automatic)

If ON/OFF codes could not be found by Brand in the Manual Mode, try searching by source type in the Automatic mode.

In the TV/PROJ CODE PROGRAM screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to AUTOMATIC.

Press the

Set Button H. The TV/PROJ AUTO PROGRAM

screen will appear.

The SOURCE will be fixed as selected (TV/PROJ). Press the

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to TRY CODES.

Repeatedly press the

‹or›

Navigation Button F to test all

System Setup

* REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 *

ASSIGN TRIGGER OUT: TV/P TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF SCREEN CONTROL LIGHTING CONTROL CURTAIN CONTROL

AV/AUX HDMI AUDIO: YES

GO TO REMOTE CNTL 1 BACK TO MAIN ROOM

BACK TO MAIN ROOM

BACK TO SOURCES

Navigation Button F until ENABLED appears in the display.

Press the

Set Button H. SAVING will appear briefly in the remote

display and then SAVED will flash four times. The HT Master Enabled configuration is now set and the remote will automatically return to operational mode.

Press the TV button on the remote. TV should appear in the remote display. Press the

On Button 1 on the remote. The

TV/projector just configured should turn On. Press the

Off Button

on the remote. The TV/projector should turn off. NOTE: If the TV/projector does not respond, be sure an IR emitter is properly connected to the

Control Out All Jack  on the AVR’s rear panel

and is properly attached to the TV/projector.

To return to normal operation mode, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote.

Screen Control

To drop and raise a projection screen with the AVR’s turn-on/turnoff functions, press the

Menu Button  on the remote to bring

the MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

so that the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL

SETUP 1 screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

so that the cursor is pointed at GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen

will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cur-

sor is pointed at the SCREEN CONTROL line. Press the

Set

Button H

. The SCREEN CONTROL SETUP screen will appear.

Carrier

With the cursor positioned next to CARRIER, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the proper setting. NOTE: Most

IR remotes used with common-source components will have a carrier, so YES should be selected as a first test. Some cable box remotes do not use a carrier so, if a code setting doesn’t work, try changing this setting.

Invert Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

INVERT CODE. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select

YES/NO. Most devices will be set to NO. Certain devices (Sony S-Link, Harman Kardon remote control In) will require a YES setting. Try changing this setting if a specific code selection does not work for a given device.

Program Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the PROGRAM CODE line. Press the

Set Button H. The

SCREEN CODE PROGRAM screen will appear.

Screen Program Code (Manual)

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the MANUAL line. Press the

Set Button H. The SCREEN

MANUAL PROG screen will appear. SOURCE TYPE will be fixed

as selected (SCREEN).

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to BRAND. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the

appropriate brand.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to TRY CODES. With the AVR21ENR1 Main Room remote

selected device type commands until the unit turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor next to YES. Press the

Set Button H to “save” the code

group. This will set this code group for ON/OFF control of the TV/projector.

If no further programming is required, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operation mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor next to BACK TO T/P CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤Navigation Button F again to

move the cursor next to BACK TO T/P CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The TV/PROJ CONTROL SETUP

screen will appear.

To program SCREEN UP/DOWN, LIGHTING ON/OFF, CURTAIN OPEN/CLOSE, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to move the cursor next to BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP.

Press the

Set Button H. See the Screen Control and Lighting

Control

sections.

If a particular brand or functional codes from a source type cannot be found in the onboard IR code Library, IR commands for TV/projector On/Off can be taught to the AVR from the original equipment remote. To teach TV/projector On/Off codes to the AVR, proceed to the

LEARN CODE section.

TV/Proj Program (Learn Code)

To teach the AVR21EN TV/Projector ON/OFF codes, in the TV/PROJ CONTROL SETUP screen, press the

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor next to LEARN CODE. Press the

Set Button H. The TV/PROJ CODE LEARN screen will appear.

With the cursor positioned next to the USING THE

‹›

KEYS

line, press the

Set Button H. The message: USING THE

‹›

KEYS SELECT FUNCTION TO BE PROG will start to flash, indicating a function can be selected for learning. Press the

‹

Navigation Button F to select TV/PROJ POWER ON.

When the ON function appears, press the

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to POINT ORIGINAL REM

TO AVR DISPLAY PRESS KEY. Press the

Set Button H.

The POINT ORIGINAL message will start to flash. Point the original remote at the

IR Sensor  in the Information

Display O

on the AVR front panel and press the button with the

original code until the message stops flashing and CODE LEARNED appears on screen.

The cursor will automatically return to the USING THE

‹›

KEYS line. Repeat steps above to program the Off command.

If CODE NOT LEARNED appears, try to learn the code again. It may be a good idea to replace the original remote’s batteries to improve signal output from the remote. In some cases, there will be codes that the AVR just is not capable of learning. Contact the Audioaccess Technical Service Department for advice if necessary.

Test TV/Projector Code

To test the TV/PROJ ON/OFF commands the AVR21ENR1 remote must be configured for HT MASTER ON/OFF ENABLED.

Press and hold the

Rem Menu Button  on the remote until the

Set Button H lights red. Press the ⁄Navigation Button F

TWICE so HT MASTER ON/OFF shows in the remote’s LCD Information Display. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

System Setup

pointing at the AVR front panel, starting with 1, slowly press the numeric buttons through the range indicated on screen, until the unit being configured turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to YES. Press

the

Set Button H. This will “save” this code group for On/Off

control of the TV/Projector.

If no IR ON/OFF commands were found, see

Automatic and Learn.

If no further programming is required, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to

move the cursor next to BACK TO SCR CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤Navigation Button F again to

move the cursor next to BACK TO SCR CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The SCREEN CONTROL SETUP screen

will appear.

To program TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF, LIGHTING ON/OFF, CURTAIN OPEN/CLOSE, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor next to BACK TO REM CNTL

SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. See the TV/Projector and

Lighting sections.

Screen Program Code (Automatic)

If On/Off codes could not be found by Brand in the Manual mode, try searching by source type in the Automatic mode.

In the SCREEN CODE PROGRAM screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to: AUTOMATIC.

Press the

Set Button H. The SCREEN AUTO PROGRAM screen

will appear.

The SOURCE will be fixed as selected (SCREEN). Press the

Navigation Button Fto move the cursor next to: TRY CODES.

Repeatedly press the

‹ or›

Navigation Button F to test all

selected device type commands until the unit turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor next to: YES. Press the

Set Button H to “save” the code

group. This will set this code group for ON/OFF control of the Screen.

If no further programming is required, press the AVR Button

on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor next to: BACK TO SCREEN CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤Navigation Button F again to

move the cursor next to: BACK TO SCREEN CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The SCREEN CONTROL SETUP

screen will appear.

To program TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF, LIGHTING ON/OFF, CURTAIN OPEN/CLOSE, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

to move the cursor next to: BACK TO REM CNTL

SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. See the Screen Program and

Lighting Control sections.

If a particular brand or functional codes from a source type cannot be found in the onboard IR code Library, IR commands for Screen Up/Down can be taught to the AVR from the original equipment remote. To teach Screen Up/Down codes to the AVR, proceed to the

Learn Code section.

Screen Program (Learn Code)

To teach the AVR21EN Screen On/Off codes, in the SCREEN CONTROL SETUP screen, press the

Navigation Button F to

move the cursor next to LEARN CODE. Press the

Set Button H.

The SCREEN CODE LEARN screen will appear.

With the cursor positioned next to USING THE

‹›

KEYS line,

press the

Set Button H. The message USING THE

‹›

KEYS

SELECT FUNCTION TO BE PROG will start to flash, indicat-

ing a function can be selected for learning. Press the

‹

Navigation

Button F

to select SCREEN POWER ON. When the ON

function appears, press the

Navigation Button F to position

the cursor next to POINT ORIGINAL REM TO AVR DISPLAY PRESS KEY. Press the

Set Button H. The POINT

ORIGINAL message will start to flash. Point the original

remote at the

IR Sensor  in the Information Display O on

the AVR front panel and press the button with the original code until the message stops flashing and CODE LEARNED appears on-screen.

The cursor will automatically return to the USING THE

‹›

KEYS line. Repeat steps above to program the Off command.

Test Screen Code

To test the Screen On/Off commands the AVR21ENR1 remote must be configured for HT Master On/Off Enabled.

Press and hold the

Rem Menu Button  on the remote until the

Set Button H lights red. Press the ⁄Navigation Button F

TWICE so that HT MASTER ON/OFF shows in the remote’s LCD Information Display. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until ENABLED appears in the display.

Press the

Set Button H. SAVING will appear briefly in the

remote display and then SAVED will flash four times. The HT Master Enabled configuration is now set and the remote will automatically return to operational mode.

Press the

TV Button 5 on the remote. TV should appear in the

remote display. Press the

On Button 1 on the remote. The screen

just configured should turn on or drop. Press the

Off Button 0

on the remote. The screen should turn off or retract. NOTE: If the screen does not respond, make sure an IR emitter is properly connected to the

Control Out All Jack  on the AVR’s rear panel

and is properly attached to the screen.

To return to normal operational mode, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote.

Voltage Trigger (Screen)

The Trigger Out  on the AVR’s rear panel can be controlled in two modes:

AVR On/Off: Simply put, when the AVR turns on, the Trigger Out Jack 

outputs a constant +12V DC control voltage. In this case

with the

Trigger Out  being used to drop a screen, the screen

will drop as soon as the AVR is turned on. When the AVR is turned off, the

Trigger Out Jack  drops to 0V DC, and the screen retracts.

System Setup

the cursor is pointed at GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen will

appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is

pointed at the LIGHTING CONTROL line. Press the

Set Button

. The LIGHTING CONTROL SETUP screen will appear.

Carrier

With the cursor positioned next to CARRIER, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the proper setting. NOTE: Most IR

Invert Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

INVERT CODE. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select

Program Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the PROGRAM CODE line. Press the

Set Button H. The

LIGHTING CODE PROGRAM screen will appear.

Lighting Program Code (Manual)

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the MANUAL line. Press the

Set Button H. The LIGHTING

MANUAL PROG screen will appear. SOURCE TYPE will be fixed

as selected (LIGHTING).

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to BRAND. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the

appropriate brand.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

TRY CODES. With the AVR21ENR1 Main Room remote pointing at the AVR’s front panel, starting with 1, slowly press the numeric buttons through the range indicated on screen, until the unit being configured turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to YES.

Press the

Set Button H. This will “save” this code group for

On/Off control of the lights.

If no IR On/Off commands were found, see

Lighting Program

Code (Automatic)

and Lighting Program (Learn Code).

If no further programming is required, press the AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to

move the cursor next to BACK TO LGT CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤Navigation Button F again

to move the cursor next to BACK TO LGT CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The LIGHTING CONTROL SETUP

screen will appear.

To program TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF and SCREEN ON/OFF, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H.

See the

TV/Projector and Screen sections.

NOTE: If the AVR turns on to Multiroom mode, the Trigger Out Jack 

will stay at 0V DC until the Main Room is turned on.

Manual Via Remote: In this mode, the Trigger Out Jack 

is controlled with the Trigger Button  on the AVR21ENR1 remote. When the AVR is turned on, the Trigger Out has an output of 0V DC. When the

Trigger Button  on the remote is

pressed, the Trigger Out goes to +12V DC – in this case, to drop a screen. Press the

Trigger Button  again; the voltage is cut

and the screen retracts.

To configure the AVR21EN

Trigger Out Jack  to drop a

projection screen when the Main Room is turned on:

Press the

Menu Button  on the remote to bring the MAIN

MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 screen

will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the

cursor is pointed to GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set

Button H

. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen will appear.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the ASSIGN TRIGGER OUT line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

until SCRN appears. Press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

so that the cursor is pointed at SCREEN CONTROL.

Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointed at the CONTROL line. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the preferred mode. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the

BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H.

To test the Screen Up/Down commands with AVR On/Off, turn the AVR off and manually raise the screen. To test the On function, either press the

Standby/On Button 1 on the AVR’s front panel

or press the

On Button 1 on the AVR21ENR1 remote. The AVR

should turn on and the screen should drop.

To test the Off function, either press the

Standby/On Button 1

on the AVR’s front panel or press the Off Button 0 on the AVR21ENR1 remote. The AVR should turn off and the screen should retract.

To test the Screen Up/Down commands with Manual Via Remote, turn the AVR off and manually raise the screen. Turn the AVR on by pressing the

Standby/ON Button 1 on the AVR’s front panel

or press the

On Button 1 on the remote. (The AVR should be on,

but the screen should still be retracted.) Press the

Trigger Button



on the remote. The screen should drop. Press the Trigger

Button 

again and the screen should retract.

Exit Setup

If no further programming is required, press the AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

Lighting Control

To control the Main Room lighting with the AVR turn-on/turn-off functions, press the

Menu Button  on the remote to bring the

MAIN MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1

screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

System Setup

Lighting Program Code (Automatic)

If On/Off codes could not be found by Brand in the Manual mode, try searching by source type in the Automatic mode.

At the LIGHTING CODE PROGRAM screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to AUTOMATIC.

Press the

Set Button H. The LIGHTING AUTO PROGRAM

screen will appear.

The SOURCE will be fixed as selected (LIGHTING). Press the

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to TRY CODES.

Repeatedly press the

‹or›

Navigation Button F to test all

selected device type commands until the unit turns off. When the unit turns off, press the

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor next to YES. Press the

Set Button H to “save” the code

group. This will set this code group for On/Off control lighting.

If no further programming is required, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor next to

BACK TO LGT CODE PROG. Press the

Set

Button

. Press the

Navigation Button F again to move

the cursor next to

BACK TO LGT CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The LIGHTING CONTROL SETUP screen

will appear.

To program TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF, SCREEN ON/OFF, CURTAIN OPEN/CLOSE, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to move the cursor next to BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP.

Press the

Set Button H. See the TV/Projector, Screen and

Curtain sections.

If a particular brand or functional code from a source type cannot be found in the onboard IR code Library, IR commands for Lights On/Off, or a particular scene, can be taught to the AVR from the original equipment remote. To teach Lighting On/Off or scene codes to the AVR, proceed to the

Learn Code section.

Lighting Program (Learn Code)

To teach the AVR21EN Lighting On/Off codes, in the LIGHTING CONTROL SETUP screen, press the

Navigation Button F to

move the cursor next to LEARN CODE. Press the

Set Button H.

The LIGHTING CODE LEARN screen will appear.

With the cursor positioned next to USING THE

‹›

KEYS

line, press the

Set Button H. The message USING THE

‹›

KEYS SELECT FUNCTION TO BE PROG will start to flash, indicating a function can be selected for learning. Press the

‹

Navigation Button F to select LIGHTING POWER ON.

When the ON function appears, press the

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to POINT ORIGINAL REM

TO AVR DISPLAY PRESS KEY. Press the

Set Button H.

The POINT ORIGINAL message will start to flash. Point the original remote at the

IR Sensor  in the Information

Display

on the AVR’s front panel and press the button with

the original code until the message stops flashing and CODE LEARNED appears on screen.If you want to program a lighting scene change rather than On, program LIGHTING POWER ON with the IR command for the Main Room regular lighting scene.

The cursor will automatically return to the USING THE

‹›

KEYS line. Repeat steps above to program the OFF command.

If you want to program a lighting scene change rather than Off, program LIGHTING POWER OFF with the IR command for the “Movie Mode” lighting scene.

Test Lighting Code

To test the Lighting On/Off commands the AVR21ENR1 remote must be configured for HT Master On/Off Enabled.

Press and hold the

Rem Menu Button  on the remote until the

Set Button H lights red. Press the ⁄Navigation Button F

twice so HT MASTER ON/OFF shows in the remote’s LCD

Information Display 2. Press the Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until ENABLED appears in the display.

Press the

Set Button H. SAVING will appear briefly in the

remote upper display line and then SAVED will flash four times. The HT Master Enabled configuration is now set and the remote will automatically return to operational mode.

Press the

TV Button 5 on the remote. TV should appear in the

remote upper display line. Press the

On Button 1 on the remote.

The Lighting just configured should turn on or change scene. Press the

Off Button 0 on the remote. The Lighting should turn off or

change scene.

NOTE: If the Lighting system does not respond, be

sure an IR emitter is properly connected to the

Control Out All

Jack 

on the AVR’s rear panel and is properly attached to the

Lighting Controller.

To return to normal operational mode press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote.

Voltage Trigger (Lighting)

The Trigger Out Jack  on the AVR’s rear panel can be controlled in two modes:

AVR On/Off: Simply put, when the AVR turns on, the Trigger Out Jack 

outputs a constant +12V DC control voltage. In this case,

with the

Trigger Out Jack  being used to turn lights on or set

a lighting scene when the AVR is turned on. When the AVR is turned off, the

Trigger Out Jack  drops to 0V DC, and the lights

turn off or switch to a different scene.

NOTE: If the AVR turns on

to Multiroom mode, the

Trigger Out Jack  will stay at 0V DC

until the Main Room is turned on.

Manual Via Remote: In this mode, the Trigger Out Jack  is

controlled with the

Trigger Button  on the AVR21ENR1

remote. When the AVR is turned on, the

Trigger Out Jack  has

an output of 0V DC. When the

Trigger Button  on the remote

is pressed, the

Trigger Out Jack  goes to +12V DC, in this case,

to turn the lights on or set a scene. Press the

Trigger Button 

again; the voltage is cut and the lights turn off or switch to a different scene.

To configure the AVR21EN

Trigger Out Jack  to control lighting

when the Main Room is turned on:

Press the

Menu Button  on the remote to bring the MAIN

MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so

that the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1

System Setup

Invert Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to INVERT CODE. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to

select YES/NO. Most devices will be set to NO. Certain devices (Sony S-Link, Harman Kardon remote control In) will require a YES setting. Try changing this setting if a specific code selection does not work for a given device.

Program Code

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the PROGRAM CODE line. Press the

Set Button H. The

CURTAIN CODE PROGRAM screen will appear.

Screen Program Code (Manual)

Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the MANUAL line. Press the

Set Button H. The CURTAIN

MANUAL PROG screen will appear. SOURCE TYPE will be

fixed as selected (CURTAIN).

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next

to BRAND. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the

appropriate brand.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to YES. Press the Set Button H. This will “save” this code group for On/Off control

of the curtain.

If no IR On/Off commands were found, see see

Lighting Program

Code (Automatic)

and Lighting Program (Learn Code).

If no further programming is required, press the AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor next to BACK TO CURTAIN CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤ Navigation Button F again to

move the cursor next to BACK TO CURTAIN CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The CURTAIN CONTROL SETUP

screen will appear.

To program TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF, DRAPES OPEN/CLOSE and LIGHTING ON/OFF, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

to move the cursor next to: BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. See the TV/Projector, Drapes and

Lighting sections.

Curtain Program Code (Automatic)

If On/Off codes could not be found by Brand in the Manual mode, try searching by source type in the Automatic mode.

At the CURTAIN CODE PROGRAM screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to AUTOMATIC.

Press the

Set Button H. The CURTAIN AUTO PROGRAM

screen will appear.

The SOURCE will be fixed as selected (CURTAIN). Press the

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to TRY CODES.

Repeatedly press the

‹or›

Navigation Button F to test all

selected device type commands until the unit turns off. When the

screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen will appear.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the ASSIGN TRIGGER OUT line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

until LIGHT appears. Press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

so that the cursor is pointed at LIGHTING CONTROL.

Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointed at the CONTROL line. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the preferred mode. Press

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the BACK

TO REM CNTL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H.

To test the Lighting On/Off commands with AVR On/Off, turn the AVR off and manually turn the lights off. To test On, either press the

Standby/On Button 1 on the AVR’s front panel or press the

ON Button 1 on the AVR21ENR1 remote. The AVR should turn

on and the lights should turn on or change scenes.

To test the Off function, either press the

Standby/On Button 1

on the AVR’s front panel; or press the Off Button 0 on the AVR21ENR1 remote. The AVR should turn off and the lights should turn off or change scenes.

To test the Lighting commands with Manual Via Remote, turn the AVR off and manually turn the lights off. Turn the AVR on by pressing the

Standby/On Button 1 on the AVR’s front panel

or press the

On Button 1 on the remote. (The AVR should be on,

but the lights should still be off.) Press the

Trigger Button 

on the remote. The lights should turn on or change scene. Press the

Trigger Button  again and the lights should turn off or

change scenes.

Exit Setup

If no further programming is required, press the AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

Curtain Control

To open and close a curtain with the AVR turn-on/turn-off functions, press the

Menu Button  on the remote to bring the MAIN

MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1

screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen will

appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is

pointed at the CURTAIN CONTROL line. Press the

Set Button

. The CURTAIN CONTROL SETUP screen will appear.

Carrier

With the cursor positioned next to CARRIER, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the proper setting. NOTE: Most

System Setup

unit turns off, press the

Navigation Button F to move the

cursor next to YES. Press the

Set Button H to “save” the code

group. This will set this code group for On/Off control of the screen.

If no further programming is required, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operation mode.

To continue in setup, press the

Navigation Button F to move

the cursor next to BACK TO CURTAIN CODE PROG. Press the

Set Button H. Press the ¤ Navigation Button F again to

move the cursor next to BACK TO CURTAIN CNTL SETUP. Press the

Set Button H. The CURTAIN CONTROL SETUP

screen will appear.

To program TV/PROJECTOR ON/OFF, DRAPES OPEN/CLOSE and LIGHTING ON/OFF press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to move the cursor next to BACK TO REM CNTL SETUP.

Press the

Set Button H. See the Screen and Lighting sections.

If a particular brand or functional codes from a source type cannot be found in the on-board IR code Library, IR commands for Curtain Open/Close can be taught to the AVR from the original equipment remote. To teach Curtain Open/Close codes to the AVR, proceed to the

Learn Code section

Curtain Program (Learn Code)

To teach the AVR21EN Screen On/Off codes, in the CURTAIN CONTROL SETUP screen, press the

Navigation Button F to

move the cursor next to LEARN CODE. Press the

Set Button H.

The CURTAIN CODE LEARN screen will appear.

With the cursor positioned next to USING THE

‹›

KEYS line,

press the

Set Button H. The message USING THE

‹›

KEYS

SELECT FUNCTION TO BE PROG will start to flash, indicating

a function can be selected for learning. Press the

‹

Navigation

Button F

to select CURTAIN POWER ON. When the ON

function appears, press the

Navigation Button F to position

the cursor next to POINT ORIGINAL REM TO AVR DISPLAY PRESS KEY. Press the

Set Button H. The POINT

ORIGINAL message will start to flash. Point the original remote

toward the

IR Sensor  in the Information Display O on the

AVR front panel and press the button with the original code until the message stops flashing and CODE LEARNED appears on screen.

The cursor will automatically return to the USING THE

‹›

KEYS line. Repeat the steps above to program the Off command.

Test Curtain Code

To test the Curtain On/Off commands the AVR21ENR1 remote must be configured for HT Master On/Off Enabled.

Press and hold the

Rem Menu Button  on the remote until the

Set Button H lights red. Press the ⁄Navigation Button F

TWICE so that HT MASTER ON/OFF shows in the remote’s LCD Information Display. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until ENABLED appears in the display.

Press the

Set Button H. SAVING will appear briefly in the

remote display and then SAVED will flash four times. The HT

Master Enabled configuration is now set and the remote will automatically return to operational mode.

Press the

TV Button 5 on the remote. TV should appear in the

remote display. Press the

On Button 1 on the remote. The cur-

tain just configured should turn on or open. Press the

Off Button

on the remote. The curtain should turn off or close. NOTE: If the curtain does not respond, make sure an IR emitter is properly connected to the

Control Out All Jack  on the AVR’s rear panel

and is properly attached to the curtain.

To return to normal operational mode, press the

AVR Button 4

on the AVR21ENR1 remote.

Voltage Trigger (Curtain)

The Trigger Out Jack  on the AVR’s rear panel can be controlled in two modes:

AVR On/Off: Simply put, when the AVR turns on, the Trigger Out Jack 

outputs a constant +12V DC control voltage. In this case

with the

Trigger Out Jack  being used to open a curtain, the

curtain will open as soon as the AVR is turned on. When the AVR is turned off, the

Trigger Out Jack  drops to 0V DC, and the curtain

closes.

NOTE: If the AVR turns on to Multiroom mode, the Trigger

Out Jack 

will stay at 0V DC until the Main Room is turned on.

Manual Via Remote: In this mode, the Trigger Out Jack 

is controlled with the Trigger Button  on the AVR21ENR1 remote. When the AVR is turned on, the

Trigger Out Jack  has

an output of 0V DC. When the

Trigger Button  on the remote

is pressed, the

Trigger Out Jack  goes to +12V DC, in this case

to drop a screen. Press the

Trigger Button  again, the voltage

is cut and the screen retracts.

To configure the AVR21EN

Trigger Out Jack  to open a curtain

when the Main Room is turned on:

Press the

Menu Button  on the remote to bring the MAIN

MENU to the screen. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that

the cursor is pointed at the REMOTE CONTROL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 1 screen

will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the

cursor is pointed at GO TO REMOTE CNTL 2. Press the

Set

Button H

. The REMOTE CNTL SETUP 2 screen will appear.

Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed

at the ASSIGN TRIGGER OUT line. Press the

‹/›

Navigation

Button F

until SCRN appears. Press the⁄/

Navigation Button

so that the cursor is pointed at CURTAIN CONTROL. Press the

Set Button H. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F

so that the cursor is pointed at the CONTROL line. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select the preferred mode. Press

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F so that the cursor is pointed at the BACK

TO REM CNTL SETUP line. Press the

Set Button H.

To test the Curtain Open/Close commands with AVR On/Off, turn the AVR off and manually close the curtain. To test the On function, either press the

Standby/ON Button 1 on the AVR’s front panel

or press the

ON Button 1 on the AVR21ENR1 remote. The AVR

should turn on and the curtain should open.

To test the Off function, either press the

Standby/ON Button 1

on the AVR’s front panel or press the Off Button 0 on the AVR21ENR1 remote. The AVR should turn off and the curtain should close.

System Setup

Figure 59.

Assign Services Screen

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to ASSIGN SERVICES press the

Set Button H. The ASSIGN

SERVICES screen will appear (

Figure 59).

2. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, position the cursor next

to ENTERTAINMENT. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F,

select YES to be able to select and control the common A/V sources or NO if this function is not required.

3. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, position the cursor next

to PAGING. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select YES

to be able to talk to other zones using the KP21 built-in microphone or NO if this function is not required.

4. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, position the cursor next

to MONITORING. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select

YES to be able to listen to other zones using the KP21 built-in microphones and/or view activity in those zones if equipped with cameras, or NO if this function is not required.

5. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, position the cursor next

to WAKE-UP. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select YES

to be able to configure individual zones or groups of zones to turn on at specific times and to specific sources, or NO if this function is not required.

6. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, position the cursor next

to SLEEP. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select YES

to be able to configure individual zones or groups of zones to turn off at specific preprogrammed times or NO if this function is not required.

7. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, position the cursor next

DOOR SETUP and press the

Set Button H. Available

doors will be identified by

DOOR1: YES, DOOR2: YES, etc.

Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, place the cursor next to

DOOR NUMBER CAM and then using the

‹/›

Navigation

Button

select the camera to be assigned to that door.

8. When finished, either press the

Exit Button G on the remote

to return to system function or position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H

to continue Zone Setup.

Assign Entertainment Services

This menu determines which common sources the remote zones will have access to. Typically, all sources would be allowed (

YES),

but there may be some sources (such as a specific DVD player) that

* ASSIGN SERVICES *

ENTERTAINMENT PAGING MONITORING WAKE-UP SLEEP DOOR SETUP

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: YES : YES : YES : YES : YES

To test the Curtain Open/Close commands with Manual Via Remote, turn the AVR off and manually close the curtain. Turn the AVR on by pressing the

Standby/On Button 1 on the AVR’s front

panel or press the

On Button 1 on the remote. (The AVR should

be on, but the curtain should still be closed.) Press the

Trigger

Button 

on the remote. The curtain should open. Press the

Trigger Button  again and the curtain should close.

Exit Setup

If no further programming is required, press the AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote and then the Exit Button G to return to normal operational mode.

Zone Setup

With all system components installed and connected, the system will function to its default settings. That is, a KP21 can turn the system on, select and control sources and adjust volume, in addition to some other basic functions.

There are other, more advanced system functions that require setup, using the same on-screen menu that was used to set up the Main Room, given that the use and configuration of every system is different. To enter the Zone Setup mode:

1. In the Main Room, turn on the AVR21EN and main room video display.

2. Press the

AVR Button 4on the AVR21ENR1 Main Room remote.

3. Press the

MENU Button  on the remote. The MAIN MENU

will appear (

Figure 58).

Figure 58.

Main Menu

4. Press the

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to

ZONE SETUP.

5. Press the

Set Button H. The ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 screen

will appear.

Assign Services

This menu will configure the multiroom section of the system for various system functions such as Entertainment (A/V Sources), Paging, Monitoring, Wake-Up Timers, Sleep Timers and Door Answer. Any services turned off in this screen will not be available to any part of the multiroom system. Setting the services by zone is done in a later section. To assign system services:

Zone Setup

* * MAIN MENU * *

CLOCK SETUP MAIN ROOM SETUP ZONE SETUP REMOTE CONTROL SETUP RESTORE NTWRK DEFAULTS DIAGNOSTICS

EXIT MENU

are only to be selected and controlled by the Main Room. If a source has been blocked (NO), a message will appear on the KP21 Information Display: SOURCE NOT AVAILABLE CHECK

SETTINGS.

Figure 60.

Assign Entertainment Services Screen

The system default permits all sources the remote zones, so if you do not wish to block any sources from the remote zones, you may skip this section and proceed to NAME PAGING GROUPS or press the

Exit Button G to exit Setup. To assign Entertainment

Services by source:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to ASSIGN ENTERTAINMENT SERVICES, press the

Set

Button H

. The ASSIGN ENTERTAINMENT SERVICES

screen will appear (

Figure 60).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to a source that is to be blocked from the remote zones.

3. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to change that source’s

status to NO. The selected source will not be available to the remote zones.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 for any other sources to be blocked from the remote zones.

5. To continue Setup, position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H. The ZONE

SETUP PAGE 1 screen will appear.

6. To exit Setup and return to the system mode, press the

Exit Button G.

Name Paging Groups

Paging Groups are combinations of different zones that can be selected at different times for Paging. Some typical examples would be paging groups consisting of all bedrooms, just the children’s bedrooms or a group including the living room, family room and dining room. As part of the system default, there is an ALL Group to page all zones, and each keypad can be selected individually to page a particular zone. This leaves only the special groupings required by the homeowner to be set up. It is recommended that you discuss this option with the homeowner to determine how best to configure this feature.

Figure 61.

Name Paging Groups Screen

This section names the paging groups. Building the groups will be done in a later section. To name Paging Groups:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to NAME PAGING GROUPS, press the

Set Button H. The

NAME PAGING GROUPS screen will appear (

Figure 61).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to NAME. Press the

Set Button H. A white rectangle will flash

to the right of NAME: indicating that the remote can be used to enter the letters for the group name.

3. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name (e.g., Bedrooms). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to the

next letter position.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 above until the Paging Group Name has been spelled out. Press the

Set Button H. This will store the name

and the cursor will appear next to NAME.

5. To name additional groups, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to GROUP. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select another group.

6. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired Paging Groups have been named.

7. To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 will appear.

Name Entertainment Groups

Entertainment Groups allow multiple zones to be turned on and off together, using the Party Mode control. This feature is desirable for parties, to be able to easily select background music through common areas. The zones within the groups will turn on, and play the same source. The zones within the groups can be configured to each turn on to the same source, different sources or the last source selected in each zone. Each zone within the group will turn on to its preset volume or last volume set, as configured by zone. The individual zones will maintain local volume and mute functions. A zone can only be part of one Entertainment Group, and multiple groups can be active at the same time.

Zone Setup

* ASSIGN SERVICES *

ENTERTAINMENT PAGING MONITORING WAKE-UP SLEEP DOOR SETUP

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: YES : YES : YES : YES : YES

* NAME PAGING GROUPS *

GROUP NAME

DISC 3 RADIO 1

RADIO 2 VR AV AUX CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: A : PAGE A

: YES : YES

: YES : YES : YES : YES

BACK TO MAIN MENU

Figure 63.

Name Wake-Up Groups Screen

This section names the Wake-Up Groups. Building the groups will be done in a later section. To name Wake-Up Groups:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to NAME WAKE-UP GROUPS, press the

Set Button H. The NAME

WAKE-UP GROUPS screen will appear (

Figure 63).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to NAME. Press the

Set Button H. A white rectangle will flash

to the right of NAME: indicating that the remote can be used to enter the letters for the group name.

3. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name. (e.g., Master Suite). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor

to the next letter position.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 above until the Wake-Up Group Name has been spelled out. A Group Name can have up to 12 letters. Press the

Set Button H. This will store the name and return

the cursor back to the arrow next to NAME.

5. To name additional groups, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to GROUP. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select another group.

6. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired Wake-up Groups have been named. Up to eight Wake-Up Groups can be created.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 will appear.

Name Sleep Groups

Sleep Groups set scheduled times to shut down specific zones or groups of zones. This is a convenient feature for turning off the Patio Zone at a predetermined time, as not to disturb the neighbors, or for managing systems if zones are turned on and then left alone.

NOTE: It is not necessary to set a Sleep Group for a Wake-

Up Group. Wake-Up Groups have a preset duration for activity before they shut off automatically.

* NAME WAKE-UP GROUPS *

GROUP NAME

DISC 3 RADIO 1

RADIO 2 VR

BACK TO MAIN MENU

AV AUX CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: 1 : WAKE 1

: YES : YES

: YES : YES : YES : YES

Figure 62.

Name Entertainment Groups Screen

This section names the Entertainment Groups. Building the groups will be done in a later section. To name Entertainment Groups:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to NAME ENTERTAINMENT GROUPS, press the

Set Button H. The

NAME ENTERTAINMENT GROUPS screen will appear (

Figure 62).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to NAME. Press the

Set Button H. A white rectangle will flash

to the right of NAME: indicating that the remote can be used to enter the letters for the group name.

3. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name (e.g., Livingroom). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to the

next letter position.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 above until the Paging Group Name has been spelled out. A Group Name can have up to 12 letters. Press the

Set Button H. This will store the name, and the cursor will

appear next to NAME.

5. To name additional groups, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to GROUP. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select another group.

6. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired Entertainment Groups have been named. Up to eight Entertainment Groups can be created.

7. To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 will appear.

Name Wake-Up Groups

Wake-Up Groups allow multiple zones or groups of zones to be automatically turned on at predetermined times. Wake-Up is good for use as an “alarm clock,” with the added luxury of being programmable for any of the common sources (e.g., a zone can turn on to the local TV News channel for traffic and weather or stock reports, first thing in the morning). Wake-Up can also be a good home security feature by programming different zones to come on at different times with different sources to make a vacant home look occupied.

Zone Setup

* NAME ENTERTAINMENT GROUPS *

GROUP NAME

DISC 3 RADIO 1

RADIO 2 VR AV AUX CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: 1 : ENT 1

: YES : YES

: YES : YES : YES : YES

BACK TO MAIN MENU

Figure 64.

Name Sleep Groups Screen

This section names the Sleep Groups. Building the groups will be done in a later section. To name Sleep Groups:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to NAME SLEEP GROUPS, press the

Set Button H. The NAME

SLEEP GROUPS screen will appear (

Figure 64).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

NAME. Press the

Set Button H. A white rectangle will flash

to the right of

NAME: indicating that the remote can be used

to enter the letters for the group name.

3. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name. (e.g., Patio). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to the

next letter position.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 until the Sleep Group Name has been spelled out. A Group Name can have up to 12 letters. Press the

Set

Button H

. This will store the name and return the cursor back

to the arrow next to NAME.

5. To name additional groups, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to GROUP. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select another group.

6. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired Wake-up Groups have been named. Up to eight Sleep Groups can be created.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 will appear.

Camera Setup

Camera Setup is part of associating the different security and zone monitor cameras with the keypads in Zone Setup. In

ZONE

SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2

a camera can be assigned to a

specific zone, for zone video or audio/video monitoring. In

DOOR

SETUP

, a camera can be assigned to a specific door for door monitoring. Naming the cameras provides a reference to which camera is connected to which

Camera Video Input on the

AVH21 Hub(s). The camera name will appear in the KP21

Keypad

Information Display

when a monitored zone or door has a

camera assigned. If

MONITOR CAM is set to YES, the camera will

be available from the

MONITOR page of the KP21 without being

assigned to a zone keypad.

Figure 65.

Camera Setup Screen

To name and monitor Cameras:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to CAMERA SETUP, press the

Set Button H. The CAMERA

SETUP

screen will appear (

Figure 65).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor

next to

CAMERA. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to

select the Camera to be set up.

3. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor

next to NAME. Press the

Set Button H. A white rectangle will

flash to the right of NAME: indicating that the remote can be used to enter the letters for the camera name.

4. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name (e.g., Baby’s Room). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor

to the next letter position.

5. Repeat Steps 2–3 above until the Camera Name has been spelled out. A Camera Name can have up to 12 letters. Press the

Set

Button

. This will store the name and return the cursor back

to the arrow next to

NAME.

6. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor

next to

MONITOR CAM. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F

to select YES/NO. YES indicates that the camera can be monitored independently without being assigned to a keypad (Zone). NO indicates that the camera can only be monitored by selecting the keypad (Zone) it has been assigned to in the keypad/camera assigned menu.

7. To set up additional cameras, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to CAMERA. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select another camera.

8. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired Cameras have been set up. Up to seven cameras can be configured, matching the number of camera inputs on the AVH21’s.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to

BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press

the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 will appear.

Zone Setup

* NAME SLEEP GROUPS *

GROUP NAME

DISC 3 RADIO 1

RADIO 2 VR AV AUX CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: 1 : SLEEP 1

: YES : YES

: YES : YES : YES : YES

BACK TO MAIN MENU

* CAMERA SETUP *

CAMERA NAME MONITOR CAM: NODISC 3

RADIO 1 RADIO 2 VR AV AUX CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: 1 : CAM 1

: YES : YES : YES : YES : YES

BACK TO MAIN MENU

Figure 67.

Zone Setup Page 2

Keypad Setup by Number

Keypad Setup configures each keypad (zone) for how each keypad will interact with the rest of the system. This setup determines which groups, if any, a zone will be a part of. If a zone has a video camera in it, that camera will be “assigned” in this setup for the purpose of Zone Video Monitoring from other zones. Doorbell, Talk and Open functions are also configured in this section.

Keypad Setup can be executed from two menu options, Setup by Number and Setup by Name. For initial configuration, it is recommended that the Setup by Number menu be used. This option allows naming the individual zones. Once the zones have been named, the menus are identical, so choice of Setup by Number or Name becomes a matter of personal preference.

Figure 68.

Zone Setup By Number Page 1

Page 1

Zone Number

This is the default number assigned to a keypad (zone) by the system given which

KP (1-20) Keypad Terminal is connected

to on an AVH21. Keypads connected to AVH #1 will be Zones 1–7, keypads connected to AVH21 #2 will be Zones 8–14 and keypads connected to AVH #3 will be Zones 15–20. This number cannot be changed.

Name

Naming the zones serves multiple purposes. In Setup, it provides a way of knowing which zone is being configured by name (Living Room, Bedroom 1, etc.) rather than trying to keep track of which zone is which number. In operational mode, the purpose is similar, in that the zone names will be displayed on the keypads in various menus (Paging, Monitoring, etc.) and makes system operation easier by having menu selections by zone name.

* SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1 *

ZONE NUMBER: 1 NAME: KEYPAD 1 SETUP ACCESS: ALLOW PAGING GROUP: NONE ENTERTNMENT GROUP: NONE PRIORITY: MEDIUM

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

PERMISSION: KEYPAD

GO TO PAGE 2 BACK TO ZONE SETUP

* ZONE SETUP PAGE 2 *

MAIN ROOM KEYPAD: NA ZONE SETUP BY NUMBER ZONE SETUP BY NAME

RADIO 1 RADIO 2 VR

BACK TO MAIN MENU

GO TO ZONE PAGE 1

CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

Name Doors

Naming doors populates the KP21 Keypad Door submenu with names of the door options for Talk and Open. The system default will show two doors for each AVH21 on the network. A system with one AVH21 will show Door 1 and Door 2 by default. A system with two AVH21’s will also show Door 3 and Door 4 in the Door submenu. A system with three AVH21’s will include Door 5 and Door 6. By naming the doors, they will appear as

FRONT, REAR,

GARAGE, etc., to make system operation easy without having to

keep track of which door is where.

Figure 66.

Name Doors Screen

To name Doors:

1. From ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, with the cursor next to NAME DOORS, press the

Set Button H. The NAME DOORS screen

will appear (

Figure 66).

2. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to NAME. Press the

Set Button H. A white rectangle will flash

to the right of NAME: indicating that the remote can be used to enter the letters for the camera name.

3. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name (e.g., Front). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to the

next letter position.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 above until the Door Name has been spelled out. A Door Name can have up to five letters. Press the

Set

Button H

. This will store the name and return the cursor back

to the arrow next to NAME.

5. To name additional groups, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to GROUP. Press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to select another group.

6. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired Doors have been named. Up to two doors per AVH21, as described above, can be named, matching the number of door latch relays on the AVH21s.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP and press the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 will appear. Press

the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

GO TO ZONE PAGE 2. Press the

Set Button H. The ZONE

SETUP PAGE 2 screen will appear (

Figure 67). Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to ZONE

SETUP BY NUMBER. Press the

Set Button H. The SETUP

BY NUMBER PAGE 1 screen will appear (

Figure 68).

Zone Setup

* NAME DOORS *

DOOR

: 1

NAME

: DOOR 1

DISC 3 RADIO 1

RADIO 2 VR AV AUX CBL/SAT

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: YES : YES

: YES : YES : YES : YES

BACK TO MAIN MENU

To name Zones:

1. In Setup by Number Page 1, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to NAME. Press the Set Button

. A white rectangle will flash to the right of NAME: indicat-

ing that the remote can be used to enter the letters for the zone name.

2. Using either the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F or the

Alphanumeric Buttons , enter the first letter for the group

name (e.g., Kitchen). When the first letter appears on screen, press the

›

Navigation Button F to move the cursor to the

next letter position.

3. Repeat Steps 2–3 above until the Zone Name has been spelled out. A Zone Name can have up to 12 letters. Press the

Set

Button

. This will store the name and return the cursor back

to the arrow next to

NAME.

4. To name additional zones, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button

to position the cursor next to ZONE NUMBER. Press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select another zone.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 until all desired zones have been named.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to TYPE and continue to the next section.

Setup Access

Setup Access determines whether the keypad in a particular zone allows access to the Keypad Setup menu. The Keypad Setup Menu includes the settings for On Volume, Tone Controls, Party Mode Turn-On Volume, EQ, Backlight Configuration and Power-On mode. Given the complexity of the system and the sophistication of the user, a decision must be made to allow or block user access to these settings.

To Configure Setup Access:

1. In SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to position the cursor next to SETUP ACCESS.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select access setting:

ALLOW or BLOCK.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to PAGING GROUP and continue to the next section.

Paging Group

Selecting a Group in this setting will place the zone being configured into a select group of zones that will be paged, e.g., Bedrooms or Common areas when selected in the Paging submenu on the zone keypad. As described in

Naming Paging

Groups,

the system features default Paging to All (all zones) and

PAGE KEYPAD (the ability to page a specific zone) so only special groups as determined by the homeowner will need to be configured. Up to eight Paging Groups can be created. If a zone is not to be included in any of the special Paging Groups, select

NONE. With

none selected, the zone will still be accessible for paging in the All or Page Keypad menus, unless

PAGE ROOM has been set to NO,

in SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2.

To select Paging Group:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to PAGING

GROUP.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the Paging Group

for the zone being configured: NONE, A, B, C, D, E, F, G or H.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to ENTERTAINMENT GROUP and continue to the next section.

Entertainment Group

Selecting a Group in this setting will place the zone being configured into a select group of zones that will be activated (if off) and switched to a common-source (within the group). The zones will turn on to their preset levels or the last level set, as determined in zone setup. Each zone will retain its own volume, mute, source select and power controls so that a zone within a group can “opt out” at any time by selecting another source or turning off. It is not necessary to set an Entertainment Group for a given zone, so if the preference is to not have a zone included in any Entertainment Groups, select

NONE.

To select Entertainment Group:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

ENTERTAINMENT GROUP.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the Entertainment

Group for the zone being configured: NONE, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to PRIORITY and continue to the next section.

Priority

This setting sets the level of authority that any given keypad has, relative to any other keypads currently active in the system. The system default is MEDIUM for all keypads, meaning any keypad can select and control any common-source at any time, if no other system defaults have been changed.

NOTE: A source first selected

by the Main Room can only be controlled by a Remote Room if the Remote Room’s Priority is HIGH. Otherwise, in any room for which the priority is set to MEDIUM or LOW, the message IN USE BY MAIN ROOM will appear on the KP21 keypad

Information

Display

. The source can be selected and monitored (audio/video), but cannot be controlled until the Main Room selects another source or turns off.

If three keypads are active (On) and one is set to HIGH, one is set to MEDIUM and one is set to LOW, the keypad set to HIGH will always be able to do what it wants. The medium keypad will be able to do what it wants, unless it conflicts with a source selected by the HIGH keypad. In this case, a message

IN USE BY HIGH

PRIORITY KEYPAD will appear on the MEDIUM KP21 keypad’s

Information Display for about 5 seconds. The MEDIUM

keypad will not be allowed to execute the function selected or any other function for that source as long as that source is selected by the HIGH keypad. Once the HIGH keypad selects another source or turns off, the MEDIUM keypad will then be able to control the previously locked source.

The same rules apply to the LOW keypad but, in this case, it has two levels of higher authority to contend with. If a source is already selected by the HIGH or MEDIUM keypads, the LOW keypad will only be able to select a source already selected by one of the higher priority keypads, but will not be able to control it until the keypad with priority selects another source or turns off.

Zone Setup

Page 2

Keypad Number

Not configurable.

Keypad Name

Not configurable in this screen.

Page Room

This setting determines whether and when a zone will be paged. There are four options:

YES: This option allows the zone being configured to be paged

at any time.

NO: This option blocks paging to the zone being configured

at all times.

ONLY IF ON: This option will only allow paging to the zone

being configured when the zone is ON.

ONLY IF OFF: This option will only allow paging to the zone

being configured when the zone is OFF.

To set Page Room:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

PAGE ROOM.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the option for the

zone being configured: YES, NO, ONLY IF ON, ONLY IF OFF.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to MONITOR THIS ZONE and continue to the next section.

Monitor This Zone

This setting determines whether or not a zone can be “listened to” using the keypad microphone or “viewed” if the zone being configured has a local video camera installed. Zone Monitoring is controlled by selecting MONITOR from any KP21 keypad’s Main Menu. When the Monitor button is pressed, a list of all zones will appear in the KP21 keypad’s

Information Display . When a

zone is selected, a submenu of options (AUDIO, VIDEO, AUDIO/ VIDEO) will appear. If zone monitoring has been allowed for a specific

zone, one of the three options can be selected. (The message MONITORED BY KEYPAD X will appear in the

Information

Display

on the KP21 keypad of the zone being monitored.)

If NO has been selected in this option, the message CANNOT MONITOR will appear for a few seconds in the

Information

Display

on the KP21 keypad in the zone attempting to

initiate Monitor.

If a zone does not have a camera assigned, the message NO CAM ASSIGNED will appear to inform the user that the system is functioning properly in the absence of a video signal.

To set Monitor This Zone:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to MONITOR

THIS ZONE.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the permission for the

zone being configured: YES, NO.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to CAMERA ASSIGNED and continue to the next section.

If all three keypads select the same source, and HIGH turns off or selects another source, MEDIUM will assume control, and LOW will still have to wait for MEDIUM to turn off or select another source in order to have control of the selected source.

To set Priority:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

PRIORITY.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the priority for the

zone being configured: HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to PERMISSION and continue to the next section.

Permission

This setting determines the access that a given keypad has for changing Wake-Up Group and Sleep Group settings.

Keypad: This option allows the user to change Wake-Up Group

or Sleep Group settings for the specific keypad being configured. Changes will not affect any other keypad in the Group and Local Wake and Sleep settings can be configured independent of Group settings.

Group: This option allows the user to block Wake-Up Group or

Sleep Group settings for the specific keypad being configured by pressing DISABLE TIMER on the keypad. Changes will not affect any other keypad in the Group.

None: This option blocks all Wake-Up Group and Sleep Group

settings for the specific keypad being configured. This setting will also block all Local Wake and Sleep settings for the specific keypad being configured.

To set Permission:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

PERMISSION.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the permission for the

zone being configured: KEYPAD, GROUP, NONE.

To exit setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to GO TO PAGE 2 and press the

Set Button H. SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2 will appear

(

Figure 69). To return to MAIN MENU, position the cursor next to

MAIN MENU and press the

Set Button H.

Figure 69.

Zone Setup By Number Page 2

Zone Setup

* SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2 *

ZONE NUMBER: 1 NAME: KEYPAD 1 PAGE ROOM ? : YES MONITOR THIS ZONE ? : YES CAMERA ASSIGNED: NONE DOOR RING: ENABLED DOOR ANSWER: ENABLED GO TO PAGE 3 GO TO PAGE 1 BACK TO ZONE SETUP

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

Camera Assigned

This setting will associate a video camera installed in a particular zone and connected to one of the

Camera Inputs on an

AVH21 with the Video and Audio/Video Monitoring of the zone being configured. To illustrate, if the camera installed in the baby’s room (for example, Zone 4) is connected to

CAM 4 on the

AVH21, or AVH21 #1 in systems using multiple AVH’s, when Zone 4 is being configured, Camera 4 (4) should be selected for this setting. There are 7 camera inputs available for monitoring and there is a NONE option if a zone does not have a camera installed.

To set Camera Assigned:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

CAMERA ASSIGNED.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the camera for the

zone being configured: NONE, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.

To exit Setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to DOOR RING and continue to the next section.

Door Ring

Future feature.

Door Answer

This setting will determine whether the zone being configured will have the ability to “talk” to a selected two-way door panel. When the DOOR button is pressed in the KP21 keypad Main Menu, a list of available Doors will appear. Selecting a given door then gives the option to TALK to the door panel or OPEN the door lock with an associated AVH21 Door Relay. If Door Answer is ENABLED in a zone, pressing and holding the

Talk Button  will

allow the user to communicate with someone located at the selected door. If Door Answer is disabled in a zone, the message FEATURE DISABLED Check Settings will appear in the Information Display on the keypad in the zone attempting to initiate the Talk function. Door Answer is also available from the KP21R remote using the

Answer Button to select a door and the Open

Button

to open a selected door.

To enable/disable Door Answer:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 2 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

DOOR ANSWER.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the setting for the

zone being configured: ENABLED or DISABLED.

To exit setup, press the

Exit Button G. To continue Zone Setup,

position the cursor next to GO TO PAGE 3 and press the

Set Button H. SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 will appear.

(

Figure 68) To return to SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 1,

position the cursor next to GO TO PAGE 1 and press the

Set Button H.

Figure 70.

Zone Setup by Number Page 3

Page 3

Keypad #

Not configurable.

Keypad Name

Not configurable in this screen.

Door Open

This setting will determine whether the zone being configured will have the ability to activate remote door locks or not. When the

Door Button is pressed in the KP21 keypad Main Menu,

a list of available Doors will appear. Selecting a given door then gives the option to TALK to the door panel or OPEN the door lock with an associated AVH21

Door Trigger Output .

If Door Open is ENABLED in a zone, pressing the selected

Door

Open Button



will activate the selected Door Trigger

Output

and release the remote door latch. If Door Open is disabled in a zone, the message FEATURE DISABLED Check Settings will appear in the

Information Display

on the KP21 keypad in the zone attempting to initiate the Open function.

To enable/disable Door Open:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

DOOR OPEN.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the setting for the

zone being configured: ENABLED or DISABLED.

Wake-Up Group

This setting assigns the zone being configured to a Wake-Up Group. A Wake-Up Group is a group of zones that have been configured to turn on at a specific time, to a specific source, at a specific volume, for a preset duration. Each zone has the option to be a part of a Wake-Up Group (1–8) or not (NONE). All zones set to the same group number will turn on and off together. Each Wake-Up Group can have two Wake-Up Times.

NOTE: Zones can also be configured manually for individual

Wake-Up functions, when desired.

To assign a zone to a Wake-Up Group:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to WAKE-UP

GROUP.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the group for the

zone being configured: NONE, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

Zone Setup

* SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 *

ZONE NUMBER: 1 NAME: KEYPAD 1 DOOR OPEN: ENABLED WAKE-UP GROUP: NONE SET WAKE-UP TIMES SLEEP GROUP: NONE SET SLEEP TIMES

GO TO PAGE 3

GO TO PAGE 2 BACK TO ZONE SETUP

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

Duration

This setting determines how long the Wake-Up Group will stay on. The range is 1–30 minutes in 1-minute increments, with an additional option of UNTIL OFF, which will leave the zones within the group on until they are turned off individually.

To set Duration:

1. In the WAKE-UP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

DURATION.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the length of time

in minutes that the group being configured is to stay on. Select UNTIL OFF to allow the zones within the group to turn off individually.

When

This setting will configure which day or days of the week the group being configured will “wake up.” Wake-Up can be set for Daily, Weekdays, Weekends, Custom, Never or Today. The custom setting allows selecting the specific days of the week that a group is to “wake up.”

To configure When:

1. In the WAKE-UP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to WHEN.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the day(s) that

the group being configured is to “wake up:” Daily, Weekdays, Weekends, Custom, Never or Today.

3. To configure a custom schedule, with the cursor next to

WHEN,

press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F until CUSTOM appears

on screen. Press the

Set Button H. The CUSTOM WAKE-UP

TIME 1

screen will appear (

Figure 72).

Figure 72.

Custom Wake-Up Time 1

4. With the cursor positioned next to MON, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to set YES/NO. YES will have the

group wakeup on Mondays,

NO will not have the group wakeup

on Mondays. When

MON has been configured, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F. Then press the ¤Navigation Button F

to move to the next day and/or to the previous day.

5. Repeat Step 4 until all days have been configured for the custom wake-up setting. Press the

Set Button H to store the custom

setting.

6. Use the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to GO TO WAKE-UP PAGE 1-1. Press the

Set Button H.

Continue Wake-Up Setup.

* CUSTOM WAKE-UP TIME 1 *

NOTE: THESE SETTINGS

AFFECT THE ENTIRE GROUP

NAME: KEYPAD 1

WAKE-UP GROUP: NONE MON

WED FRI

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

SUN

GO TO PAGE 3

GO TO WAKE-UP PAGE 1-1

BACK TO SETUP BY NO

: YES : YES : YES : YES

TUE THU SAT

: YES : YES : YES

3. Using the ⁄/

Navigation Button F position the cursor next

to SET WAKE-UP TIMES. Press the

Set Button H. The

WAKE-UP SETUP 1-1 screen will appear (

Figure 71).

Figure 71.

Wake-Up Setup 1-1

This submenu sets the parameters for each Wake-Up Group. These setting affect the entire group, but do not affect manual Wake-Up settings set from the zone keypads.

Wake-Up Group

This indicates the Group being configured. Wake-Up Group is not selectable in this screen. The Group is selected in the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen on the WAKE-UP GROUP line.

To select a Wake-Up Group:

1. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to BACK TO SETUP BY NO. Press the

Set Button H.

2. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to WAKE-UP

GROUP.

3. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the group to be

configured: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

4. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to SET WAKE-UP TIMES. Press the

Set Button H.

Wake-Up Time

This setting assigns the time that the group being configured will turn on. This setting affects all zones in the group.

To set Wake-Up Time:

1. In the WAKE-UP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to WAKE-UP

TIME 1. Press the

Set Button H. The HOUR field will start

to flash.

2. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, select the HOUR that the

group being configured is to turn ON.

3. Press the

›

Navigation Button F. The MINUTE field will start

to flash.

4. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, select the MINUTE that

the group being configured is to turn on.

5. Press the

›

Navigation Button F. The AM/PM field will start

to flash.

6. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, select AM or PM for the

turn-on time for the group being configured.

7. Press the

Set Button H to store the Wake-Up Time.

Zone Setup

* WAKE-UP SETUP 1-1 *

NOTE: THESE SETTINGS

AFFECT THE ENTIRE GROUP

NAME: KEYPAD 1

WAKE-UP GROUP: NONE WAKE-UP TIME: 12:00 AM

DURATION: 05 MINUTES WHEN: DAILY SOURCE: LAST

GO TO PAGE 3

GO TO WAKE-UP 1 PAGE 2 BACK TO SETUP BY NO

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

Source

This setting will determine which source the Wake-Up Group will turn on to. LAST will have each zone in the group turn on to the last source selected in each of those zones. LOCAL will have each zone in the group turn on to the local source connected to the

AUX-IN on the KP21 keypads in each of those zones.

Selecting one of the common sources, Disc 1, Disc 2, Disc 3, Radio 1, Radio 2, A/V/Aux, Video Recorder or Cable/Sat, will have all zones in the group turn on to that source.

To set Source:

1. In the WAKE-UP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to move the cursor next to SOURCE.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the source that

the group being configured is to wake up to LAST, LOCAL, DISC 1, DISC 2, DISC 3, RADIO 1, RADIO 2, A/V/AUX, VIDEO RECORDER, CABLE/SAT.

3. To continue Setup, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to

position the cursor next to GO TO WAKE-UP 1 PAGE 2. Press the

Set Button H. The WAKE-UP SETUP 1-2 screen

will appear (

Figure 73).

Figure 73.

Wake-Up Setup 1-2

Wake-Up Group

Reference only. Not configurable in this screen.

Volume Setting

This setting configures the volume that all zones in the group being configured will turn on at. Consider the use of Wake-Up Groups when setting this level. Wake-Up for alarm clock purposes should be loud enough to wake someone up but without startling him or her or disturbing other zones. Also, a Wake-Up Group set for dinner-time background music should be set as exactly that – background music.

To configure Volume Setting:

1. In the WAKE-UP SETUP 1-2 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to VOLUME

SETTING.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the turn-on volume

that the group being configured is to turn on at, ranging from –10 to –50dB.

Local Control

This setting will determine whether the individual zone’s keypads will have the ability to override the Group settings.

* WAKE-UP SETUP 1-2 *

NOTE: THESE SETTINGS

AFFECT THE ENTIRE GROUP

NAME: KEYPAD 1

WAKE-UP GROUP: NONE VOLUME SETTING: -25dB

LOCAL CONTROL: YES

WHEN: DAILY

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

SOURCE: LAST

GO TO WAKE-UP 1 PAGE 1 GO TO WAKE-UP SETUP 2 BACK TO SETUP BY NO

To configure Local Control:

1. In the WAKE-UP SETUP 1-2 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

LOCAL CONTROL.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the keypads in the

group being configured:

YES/NO.

To change settings in WAKE-UP 1 PAGE 1, position the cursor next to

GO TO WAKE-UP 1 PAGE 1 and press the

Set Button H. Make changes as desired.

To set a second Wake-Up time for the Group currently being configured, position the cursor next to

GO TO WAKE-UP 2.

Press the

Set Button H and follow previous instructions, starting

WAKE-UP GROUP.

To exit the menu and return to system mode, press the

Exit

Button

. To continue Zone Setup, position the cursor next to

BACK TO SETUP BY NO. Press the

Set Button H. The

SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen will appear. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to SLEEP

GROUP. Press the

Set Button H. Proceed to the next section.

Sleep Group

This setting assigns the zone being configured to a Sleep Group. A Sleep Group is a group of zones that have been configured to turn off at a specific time. Each zone has the option to be a part of a Sleep Group (1–8) or not (NONE). All zones set to the same Group number will turn off together. Each Sleep Group can have two Sleep Times.

NOTE: Zones can also be configured manually for

individual Sleep functions, when desired.

To assign a zone to a Sleep Group:

1. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to

SLEEP GROUP.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the Sleep Group

for the zone being configured: NONE, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

3. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F position the cursor next

to SET SLEEP TIMES. Press the

Set Button H. The

SLEEP SETUP 1-1 screen will appear (

Figure 74).

Figure 74.

Sleep Setup 1-1

This submenu sets the parameters for each Sleep Group. These settings affect the entire group, but do not affect manual Sleep settings set from the zone keypads.

Zone Setup

* SLEEP SETUP 1-1 * NOTE: THESE SETTINGS

AFFECT THE ENTIRE GROUP

NAME: KEYPAD 1

SLEEP GROUP: NONE SLEEP TIME: 12:00 AM

SHUT DOWN: INSTANT WHEN: DAILY SOURCE: LAST

GO TO PAGE 3

GO TO SLEEP 1 PAGE 2 BACK TO SETUP BY NO

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

2. Using the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F, select the day(s) that

the group being configured is to “sleep”: Daily, Weekdays, Weekends, Custom, Never or Today.

3. To configure a custom schedule, with the cursor next to WHEN, press the

‹/›

Navigation Button F until CUSTOM appears

on screen. Press the

Set Button H. The CUSTOM SLEEP

TIME 1 screen will appear (

Figure 75).

Figure 75.

Custom Sleep Time 1

4. With the cursor positioned next to MON, press the ‹/

›

Navigation Button F to set YES/NO. YES will have the group

sleep on Mondays, NO will not have the group sleep on Mondays. When MON has been configured, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

. Press the

Navigation Button F to move to

the next day. Press the

⁄

Navigation Button F to move to

the previous day.

5. Repeat Step 4 until all days have been configured for the Custom sleep setting. Press the

Set Button H to store the

Custom setting.

6. Use the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to GO TO SLEEP PAGE 1-1. Press the

Set Button H.

Continue Sleep Setup.

Source

This setting will determine which source the Sleep Group will switch to. LAST will have each zone in the group switch to the last source selected in each of those zones. LOCAL will have each zone in the group switch to the local source connected to the

AUX-IN

on the KP21 keypad in each of those zones. Selecting one of the common sources, Disc 1, Disc 2, Disc 3, Radio 1, Radio 2, A/V/Aux, Video Recorder or Cable/Sat, will have all zones in the group switch to that source.

To set Source:

1. In the SLEEP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to position the cursor next to SOURCE.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the source that

the group being configured is to switch to: LAST, LOCAL, DISC 1, DISC 2, DISC 3, RADIO 1, RADIO 2, A/V/AUX, VIDEO RECORDER, CABLE/SAT.

3. To continue Setup, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to

position the cursor next to GO TO SLEEP 1 PAGE 2. Press the

Set Button H. The SLEEP SETUP 1-2 screen

will appear (

Figure 76).

* CUSTOM SLEEP TIME 1 *

NOTE: THESE SETTINGS

AFFECT THE ENTIRE GROUP

NAME: KEYPAD 1

SLEEP GROUP: NONE MON

WED FRI

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

SUN

GO TO PAGE 3

GO TO SLEEP PAGE 1-1

BACK TO SETUP BY NO

: YES : YES : YES : YES

TUE THU SAT

: YES : YES : YES

Sleep Group

This indicates the Sleep Group being configured. Sleep Group is not selectable in this screen. The Group is selected in the

SET-UP

BY NUMBER PAGE 3

screen on the SLEEP GROUP line.

To select a Sleep Group:

1. Press the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

BACK TO SETUP BY NO. Press the

Set Button H.

2. In the SETUP BY NUMBER PAGE 3 screen, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next to SLEEP

GROUP.

3. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, select the group to be

configured:

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

4. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

SET SLEEP TIMES. Press the

Set Button H.

Sleep Time

This setting assigns the time that the group being configured will turn off. This setting affects all zones in the group.

To set Sleep Time:

1. In the SLEEP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button

to position the cursor next to SLEEP TIME 1.

Press the

Set Button H. The HOUR field will start to flash.

2. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, select the HOUR that the

group being configured is to turn OFF.

3. Press the

›

Navigation Button F. The MINUTE field will start

to flash.

4. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, select the MINUTE that

the group being configured is to turn OFF.

5. Press the

›

Navigation Button F. The AM/PM field will start

to flash.

6. Using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F, select AM or PM for the

turn-off time for the group being configured.

Press the

Set Button H to store the Sleep Time.

Shut Down

This setting determines how long the Sleep Group will stay on. The range is 5–90 minutes in five-minute increments, with an additional option of

INSTANT, which will turn a zone off, if on, when the

Sleep Time for that group is reached.

To set Shut Down:

1. In the SLEEP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button

to position the cursor next to SHUT DOWN.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the length of time in

minutes that the group being configured is to stay on after the configured

SLEEP TIME. Select INSTANT to immediately

turn the group off when the Sleep Time has been reached.

When

This setting will configure which day or days of the week the group being configured will “sleep.” Sleep can be set for Daily, Weekdays, Weekends, Custom, Never or Today. The Custom setting allows selecting the specific days of the week that a group is to “sleep.”

To configure When:

1. In the SLEEP SETUP 1-1 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button

to position the cursor next to WHEN.

Zone Setup

Figure 76.

Sleep Setup 1-2

Sleep Group

Reference only. Not configurable in this screen.

Volume Setting

This setting configures the volume that all zones in the group being configured will change to when Sleep Time is reached.

To configure Volume Setting:

1. In the SLEEP SETUP 1-2 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to position the cursor next to VOLUME SETTING.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the sleep volume

that the group being configured is to switch to, in the range of –10 to –50dB.

Local Control

This setting allows an individual zone’s keypad to have the ability to set Sleep and Wake-Up settings for the local zone.

To configure Local Control:

1. In the SLEEP SETUP 1-2 screen, press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to position the cursor next to LOCAL CONTROL.

2. Using the

‹/›

Navigation Button F, set the keypads in the

group being configured: YES/NO.

To change settings in Sleep 1 Page 1, position the cursor next to GO TO SLEEP 1 PAGE 1 and press the

Set Button H.

Make changes, as desired.

To set a second Wake-Up time for the Group currently being configured, position the cursor next to GO TO SLEEP 2. Press the

Set Button H and follow previous instructions starting

at SLEEP GROUP.

To make changes or to confirm settings in Zone Setup, position the cursor next to BACK TO ZONE SETUP or GO TO PAGE

2. Press the

Set Button H. Use the

⁄/¤

/‹/

›

Navigation Buttons

to review Setup Pages and Settings. Make changes as necessary. Refer to previous instructions. Confirm system functions from zones using keypads.

To exit the menu and return to system mode, press the

Exit Button G.

Keypad Setup by Name

Keypad Setup by Name allows zone configuration when searching by Zone Name.

NOTE: The correct DIP Switch setting must be set

on the KP21. The number on the KP21 DIP Switch should match the connection on the AVH21. Please see

KP21 Connections section

for correct settings. Zone Name can only be edited in Keypad Setup by Number.

To make changes to zone settings in KEYPAD SETUP BY NAME:

1. In the Main Room, turn on the AVR21EN and Main Room video display.

2. Press the

AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote.

3. Press the

Menu Button  on the remote. The MAIN MENU

will appear.

4. Press the

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to:

ZONE SETUP.

5. Press the

Set Button H. ZONE SETUP PAGE 1, will appear.

6. Make changes in ZONE SETUP PAGE 1 as described in Zone Setup.

7. To enter ZONE SETUP BY NAME, use the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

to position the cursor next to GO TO ZONE

PAGE 2. Press the

Set Button H.

8. Use the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to position the cursor next

to ZONE SETUP BY NAME. Press the

Set Button H.

9. Use the

‹/›

Navigation Button F to select the zone to be

configured, by name.

10. Follow the instructions in the

Keypad Setup by Number section.

Diagnostics

The Diagnostics screens provide real-time system information regarding which W.H.E.N. system components are connected and the firmware versions in the components found.

To open the Diagnostics Menu:

1. In the Main Room, turn on the AVR21EN and main room video display.

2. Press the

AVR Button 4 on the AVR21ENR1 remote.

3. Press the

Menu Button  on the remote. The MAIN MENU

will appear.

4. Press the

Navigation Button F until the cursor is next to

DIAGNOSTICS.

5. Press the

Set Button H. The DIAGNOSTICS screen will

appear (

Figure 77).

Figure 77.

Diagnostics Main Menu

Settings

These screens show that the main system components and the AVR21EN and AVH21 A/V hubs are connected, powered up and functional. The values associated with each line item refer to software and firmware versions and are primarily intended for use

* DIAGNOSTICS *

SETTINGS RUN SYSTEM TEST RESTART NETWORK

RESTART NETWORK

BACK TO MAIN MENU

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

DOOR ANSWER: ENABLED GO TO PAGE 3 GO TO PAGE 1 BACK TO ZONE SETUP

Zone Setup

* SLEEP SETUP 1-2 * NOTE: THESE SETTINGS

AFFECT THE ENTIRE GROUP

NAME: KEYPAD 1

SLEEP GROUP: NONE VOLUME SETTING: -25dB

LOCAL CONTROL: YES

WHEN: DAILY SOURCE: LAST

GO TO SLEEP 1 PAGE 1 GO TO SLEEP SETUP 2 BACK TO SETUP BY NO

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

7. To return to DIAGNOSTICS, with the cursor positioned next to BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS, press the

Set Button H.

8. To return to system mode, press the

Exit Button G.

Run System Test

This test will scan the multiroom network to find the KP21 keypads that are connected to the AVH21 hubs, and ultimately to the AVR21EN, and confirm network communication. All keypads 1–20 that are communicating properly will be shown on screen. If there are keypads in the system that do not appear, check to be sure they are powered up from the WPS21 power hubs and that they are properly connected via Cat. 5e to the AVH21 hubs.

Figure 80.

System Test Screen

To Run System Test:

1. In the Main Room, with the AVR21EN and video display ON, using the AVR21ENR1 remote, press the

AVR Button 4.

2. Press the

Menu Button . The MAIN MENU will appear.

3. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to place the cursor

next to DIAGNOSTICS. Press the

Set Button H. The

DIAGNOSTICS screen will appear.

4. With the cursor next to RUN SYSTEM TEST, press the

Set

Button H

. The SYSTEM TEST RESULTS screen will

appear (

Figure 80).

5. To return to DIAGNOSTICS, with the cursor positioned next to BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS, press the

Set Button H.

6. To return to system mode, press the

Exit Button G.

Restart Network

In the unlikely event that the W.H.E.N. system should lock up, this submenu will unlock the network and restart it. This will only restart the network and will not affect any configuration that has been done to Zones, Groups, Cameras, Doors, etc.

Figure 81.

Restart Network

* RESTART NETWORK *

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO RESTART THE NETWORK ?

RESTART NETWORK

YES NO

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

DOOR ANSWER: ENABLED

BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS

GO TO PAGE 1 BACK TO ZONE SETUP

* SYSTEM TEST RESULTS *

THE FOLLOWING KEYPADS ARE COMMUNICATING: 1,2,

AVH HUB 3 STACK

CHECK CONNECTIONS TO

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

OTHER KEYPADS THAT ARE IN THE SYSTEM BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

by service personnel. In some cases, if a system is not performing properly, Audioaccess Technical Support Staff may request some of this information. These values are not accessible or configurable from this screen.

Figure 78.

System Settings Page 1

Figure 79.

System Settings Page 2

If a system has only one AVH21 A/V Hub, the Settings screens should appear as shown in

Figures 78 and 79. The values associ-

ated with AVH Hubs 2 and 3 will appear as shown in

Figure 79,

indicating no connection. If a second or third AVH21 is connected and the SETTINGS PAGE 2 screen does not populate with values indicating confirmation of connections and communication, check connections between AVH21 hubs and AVH power connections to find the problem. If problem persists, see the

Multiroom Troubleshooting Guide section.

To view Settings:

1. In the Main Room, with the AVR21EN and video display ON, using the AVR21ENR1 remote, press the

AVR Button 4.

2. Press the

Menu Button . The MAIN MENU will appear.

3. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to place the cursor

next to DIAGNOSTICS. Press the

Set Button H. The

DIAGNOSTICS screen will appear.

4. With the cursor next to SETTINGS, press the

Set Button H.

The SETTINGS PAGE 1 screen will appear (

Figure 78).

5. To view Page 2, with the cursor positioned next to GO TO SETTINGS PAGE 2, press the

Set Button H. SETTINGS

PAGE 2 will appear (

Figure 79).

6. To return to SETTINGS PAGE 1, with the cursor positioned next to GO TO SETTINGS PAGE 1, press the

Set Button

. SETTINGS PAGE 1 will appear.

* SETTINGS PAGE 2 *

AVH HUB 2 MC AVH HUB 2 STACK AVH HUB 2 ADDRESS AVH HUB 3 MC AVH HUB 3 STACK AVH HUB 3 ADDRESS

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

DOOR ANSWER: ENABLED

GO TO SETTINGS PAGE 1 BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: xxxx : xxxx : CHECK : xxxx : xxxx : CHECK

Zone Setup

* SETTINGS PAGE 1 *

AVR MAIN MC AVR BUS MC AVR STACK AVH HUB 1 MC AVH HUB 1 STACK AVH HUB 1 ADDRESS

DOOR ANSWER: ENABLED

GO TO SETTINGS PAGE 2 BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS

BACK TO ZONE SETUP

: 2.11 : 1.22 : 0.03 : 1.02 : 0.03 : OK

To Restart the Network:

1. In the Main Room, with the AVR21EN and video display ON, using the AVR21ENR1 remote, press the

AVR Button 4.

2. Press the

Menu Button . The MAIN MENU will appear.

3. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to place the cursor

next to

DIAGNOSTICS. Press the

Set Button H. The

DIAGNOSTICS screen will appear.

4. With the cursor next to RESTART NETWORK, press the

Set

Button

. The RESTART NETWORK screen will appear

(

Figure 81).

5. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F to place the cursor next

to YES. Press the

Set Button H. The menu will automatically

return to the DIAGNOSTICS screen.

6. To manually return to DIAGNOSTICS, without restarting, position the cursor next to BACK TO DIAGNOSTICS, press the

Set Button H.

To return to system mode, press the

Exit Button G.

KP21 Setup Menu and Options

KEYPAD

1. Press Menu .

2. Press

Setup .

Setup 1

ON VOLUME:

On Volume is the level the zone will turn on to with On Volume set to YES on the SETUP 2 page. On Volume set to NO will have the zone turn on to the volume set when the zone was turned off.

Press the

ON VOLUME

⁄

Buttons to adjust Turn-On

Volume.

PAGING VOLUME:

Paging Volume is the level the zone will switch to for incoming pages.

Press the

PAGING VOLUME

⁄

Buttons to adjust

Paging Volume.

BASS

Press the ¤ BASS

⁄

Buttons to adjust Bass.

TREBLE

Press the ¤ TREBLE

⁄

Buttons to adjust treble.

Press

> to advance to SETUP 2.

Setup 2

ON VOLUME

Set to YES to have the zone turn on to the level set in Setup 1/ ON VOLUME. Set to NO to have the zone turn on to the

volume set when the zone was turned off.

Press the ON VOL ON/OFF

Button to desired setting

as described above.

Page Volume

Set to YES to have incoming pages switch to the level set in Setup 1/PAGE VOLUME. Set to NO to have incoming pages

switch to the last set volume.

Press the PAGE ON/OFF

Button to desired setting

as described above.

PARTY VOLUME

This setting will adjust the volume that each zone in an Entertainment Group will switch to when an Entertainment Group is selected by pressing PARTY MODE from any keypad that is configured as part of an Entertainment Group.

Press the

PARTY VOL

⁄

Buttons to set zone Party

Mode Volume.

Press

< to return to Setup 1.

Press

> to advance to Setup 3.

Setup 3

SPEAKER EQ

Speaker EQ allows contouring of zone EQ by optimizing system settings for the specific models of popular speakers listed. If the speakers used do not appear in the list, select NOT LISTED.

a) Press SPEAKER EQ .

b) Press the button ( ) next to the model of speakers

connected to this keypad.

c) Press NOT LISTED if the specific model is not on the list.

d) Press

> to advance to the next page of speaker options.

e) Press

< to return to the previous page of speaker options.

f) Press BACK to return to SPEAKER EQ.

BACKLIGHT

Backlight allows selection of backlight color (green, aqua, blue, none) and fade (time-out) duration (2–20 seconds).

a) Press BACKLIGHT .

b) Select the preferred backlight color .

c) Press OFF for no backlight .

d) Press FADE MODE ON/OFF to turn fade on/off .

(OFF will leave backlight on when zone is on.)

e) Press

‹

FADE TIME

›

to adjust fade time.

f) Press

BACK to return to BACKLIGHT.

Press

< to return to SETUP 2.

Press

> to advance to SETUP 4.

Setup 4

Power On Mode

Power On mode sets the source that will be selected when this zone is turned on from the keypad or remote. SILENT will have the zone turn on to the MAIN MENU with no source selected. LOCAL will have the zone turn on to the local source. LAST will have the zone turn on to whatever source was selected when the zone was turned off. RADIO 1 and RADIO 2 will have the zone turn on to either Radio 1 or 2 as selected (Wake-Up Groups set to specific sources will turn zones on to those sources, unless the group is set to LAST).

a) Press POWER ON MODE .

b) Select the source to be selected when the zone is turned on

with the keypad or remote .

c) Press BACK to return to POWER ON MODE.

KP21 Setup

SETTINGS

This screen provides information regarding keypad firmware/software versions. There are no configurable settings in this screen .

Reset Settings

CAUTION! Pressing this button will reset this keypad’s settings to

factory defaults. Any programming for timers or preferences will be erased. Only press this button to clear all keypad settings.

a) Press RESET SETTINGS . (The zone will turn off for a few

seconds and then turn on to the SYSTEM INITIALIZING screen. The zone will turn off when reset is complete.)

b) Press the keypad POWER BUTTON .

c) Press MENU for MAIN MENU.

d) Press SETUP to configure keypad settings or select

another system function.

LED Dimmer

LED Dimmer adjusts the brightness of the keypad backlighting.

a) Press LED DIMMER .

b) Press the

LED DIMMER

⁄

Buttons until backlight is

set to preferred brightness.

c) Press BACK to return to LED DIMMER.

d) Press MENU to return to MAIN MENU.

KP21 Setup

AVR21ENR1 Remote Control

Figure 82.

AVR21EN1 Remote

1. Power Off (All) Button

2. Power On (All) Button

3. LCD Information Display

4. Input Selectors

5. System (AVR) Selector

6. TV Mode Select

7. 6CH/8CH Input Select

8. Faroudja

Processor On/Off Button

9. Test Tone Button

10. SPL Select Button

11. Audio Input Selector

12. Direct/List Select Button

13. Surround Mode Select Button

14. Angle/Tuning Mode Button

15. Guide/Level Button

16. Navigation Disc

17. Exit/Cancel Button

18. Set Button

19. Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip Button

20. Volume Up/Down Control

21. Tuning Down/Reverse Search Button

22. Record/Stop/Pause Transport Controls

23. Status/Settings Button

24. Disc Skip Up/Down Button

25. Random Play Button

26. Repeat Play Button

27. Program/PVR Replay Button

28. PVR List Button

29. Audio Button

30. Subtitle/TV/Video Button

31. Remote Backlight Button

32. Macro 1/2/3 Buttons

33. Sleep/PIP Move Button

34. Night Mode/PIP Channel Down Button

35. PVR Live Button

36. Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up Button

37. Top Menu/PIP On/Off/PIP Swap/AM/FM Button

38. On-Screen Library/Favorite Button

39. Play Transport Control Button

40. Tuning Up/Forward Search Button

41. Channel/Slow Play Up/Down Control

42. Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip Button

43. Last Channel/Distance Button

44. Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info Button

45. Zoom/Memory Button

46. Alphanumeric Keys

47. Picture Button

48. Door Open Button

49. Door Answer/Talk Button

50. 12V Trigger Button

51. Mute Button

52. EzSet Microphone Sensor

53. IR Transmitter/Receiver

AVR21ENR1 Remote Features

4. Input Selectors: Pressing one of these buttons will perform three actions at the same time. First, if the AVR21EN is not turned on, this will power up the unit. Next, it will select the source shown on the button as the input to the AVR21EN. Finally, it will change the remote control so that it controls the device selected. After pressing one of these buttons, you may need to press the

AVR Button (System Selector) 4 again

to operate some AVR21EN functions with the remote.

System Selector (AVR Button): Pressing this button will switch

the remote so that it will operate the AVR21EN's functions (accessing menus, etc.). If the AVR21EN is in the Standby mode, it will also turn the AVR21EN on.

TV Mode Select: Press this button to switch the remote keys

to directly control the local TV or video display.

6CH/8CH Input Select: Press this button to select the device

connected to the

8-Channel Direct Inputs 6. See the Main

Room Installation and Setup/8 Channel DVD Audio

section

for more information.

Faroudja®Processor On/Off: Press this button to activate the

DCDi

by Faroudja processor. Press again to deactivate the

processor.

FAROUDJA ON/OFF will appear in the AVR’s

Upper Display Line .

Test Tone Button: Press this button to stop the sequence used

to calibrate the AVR21EN’s output levels during EzSet/EQ. See the

AVR21EN Configuration/EzSet/EQ and Output Level

Adjustment

sections for more information on calibrating the

AVR21EN speaker level audio output.

10.

Disc Direct (Unmarked Round Blue Button): Press this

button when a disc changer is in use, to directly enter a disc number. After pressing this button, press the appropriate

Alphanumeric Keys  to select a disc.

11.

Audio Input Selector: After pressing the AVR button, press

this button to select one of the

Digital Audio Inputs IN for

use with its source, or to select the analog audio input for that source using the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F. It is possible to

reassign a digital audio input to sources with selectable audio inputs, even if the audio is from a different source than the one selected for play. See

AVR21EN Configuration/Source Audio

Input

for more information on using digital inputs.

12.

Direct/List Select Button: Press this button when the tuner is

in use, to directly enter a station’s frequency, or when a CD is in use to directly enter a track number. After pressing this button, press the appropriate

Alphanumeric Keys to select a station

or track. This button also activates the List function for TiVo players. See your TiVo

Owner’s Manual for more information

on the List function.

13.

Surround Mode Select Button: After pressing the AVR button,

press this button to select one of the DSP audio surround modes, such as Dolby,

Logic 7®or DTS NEO:6®or DSP. Each

press of the button selects another mode. Pressing the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button Fafter one of the modes has been selected

allows a choice of various options within the different surround modes. See the

AVR21EN Configuration/Audio Mode and

Main Room Operation/Surround Mode Selection sections

for descriptions of the different surround modes and options.

AVR21ENR1 Feature Descriptions

NOTES:

I The function names shown here are each button’s function

when used with the AVR21EN. Most buttons have additional functions when used with other devices, and some of these functions may be assigned to different buttons, depending on which device was selected. The device name will appear in the upper line of the LCD

Information Display 2 and the function

assigned to that device will appear in the lower line when the button is pressed. See the

AVR21ENR1 Function List section

for a list of the functions assigned to each button for each device type.

I Some buttons have special functions when they are pressed and

held for 3 seconds.

I The jack on the upper right side of the remote is reserved for

future use. Do not remove the plug provided or connect any device to the jack.

I The AVR21ENR1 remote control may be programmed to control

up to 11 devices. Before using the remote, it is important to press the

Input Selector 3 that corresponds to the device you

wish to operate.

I The remote is capable of operating a wide variety of products

made by other manufacturers, using control codes that are programmed into the remote’s code library. As described in

AVR21EN Configuration/Remote Control Setup and Programming the KP21ENR1 Remote Control, it is simple to

program the remote to operate your device by selecting the device type and brand, and then programming the correct set of codes for that brand.

IMPORTANT NOTE: With the exceptions of the AVR, TV and

Game/Cam, the codes output by the AVR21ENR1 are proprietary Audioaccess IR codes that are received by the AVR21EN and converted to the actual IR codes for the sources being controlled. These IR codes are output via emitters connected to the IR

Control Outputs  on the AVR21EN rear panel.

Power Off (All): Press this button to place the AVR21EN in the

Standby mode. Note that this will turn off the Main Room functions, but if the Multiroom system is activated, the AVR will continue to function and the message

MULTI-ZONE ON will

appear in the

Lower Display Line  on the AVR front panel.

Power On (All): Press this button to turn the AVR on. When

properly set up, all common-source components will automatically turn on as well. Press this button to turn on the power to TV or Game/Cam after first pressing either the

TV 5 or Game/Cam

Button 3

LCD Information Display: This two-line screen displays setup

menus and other information, depending on the commands that have been entered into the remote.

19. Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip: This multipurpose button has a different function, depending on the source in use. When used with the tuner, this button scrolls through the preprogrammed station presets. When used with optical sources (such as an external DVD/CD player), press this button once to return to the beginning of the current track, and again quickly, to go to the beginning of the previous track. The Page Down function is used with cable and satellite television to page quickly through on-screen menus.

20.

Volume Up/Down Control: To raise the volume, press towards

the top of the disc, where it is marked

⁄

Vol, and to lower the

volume, press toward the bottom of the disc, where it is marked

Vol. The left and right arrows on this disc have different

functions, depending on the source in use. See

Channel/Slow

Play Up/Down Control 

(No. 41) for more information.

21.

Tune Down/Reverse Search Button: This button has different

functions, depending on whether the tuner or another source is in use. Press this button when the tuner is in use to change the station to one with a lower frequency. When the tuner is in

MANUAL/MONO mode, each tap of this button will decrease

the frequency by one increment. When the tuner receives a strong-enough signal for adequate reception,

MANUAL

TUNED

will appear in the AVR Lower Display Line . When

the tuner is in the

AUTO/STEREO mode, press the button

to cause the tuner to scan for the next lower station with acceptable signal strength, and stop. The

Lower Display Line



will indicate AUTO TUNED. When an FM Stereo station

is tuned, the display will read

AUTO ST TUNED. When

the tuner is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press and hold this button to scan downward through the frequencies, and the tuner will stop immediately when you release this button, even if no acceptable signal is detected at that frequency. See the

Main Room Operation/Tuner Operation section for more

information on using the tuner. When an optical player source (such as a DVD changer) is in use, press this button to search quickly in reverse through the current track or chapter. Depending on the type of disc used in the DVD changer, each additional press will cycle through the available scan speeds.

22.

Record/Stop/Pause Transport Controls: These buttons have

no direct function on the AVR21EN, but are used when the remote is programmed for a compatible DVD, CD or tape player. Pressing these buttons will transmit a stop, record or pause command, according to the capabilities of the player being controlled.

23.

Status/Setting Buttons: This button has different functions,

depending on which device is in use. Press it to display an external DVD recorder’s status. For DVRs and game consoles, this button performs the Back function. For some PVRs/DVRs this button performs the Instant Replay function.

24.

Disc Skip Up/Down Button: Press the top half of the button

to select the next available disc on a DVD/CD changer (from the disc currently selected). Press the lower half to select the previous disc (to the currently selected disc).

14.

Angle/Tuning Mode Button: When the DVD mode is active,

press this button to select an alternate camera angle, if available on the current DVD. When the tuner is in use, press this button to change the tuner scan mode between manual and automatic. When the button is pressed so that

AUTO/STEREO

appears in the AVR’s Upper Display Line , only stations with acceptable signal quality will be tuned when scanning, and the tuner will play FM stations in stereo, when available. In the Auto mode, when the

Tuning Up/Down Buttons K are

pressed and held, the unit will automatically search for the next available station with good signal strength. When the

Tuning Mode Button D is pressed so that MANUAL/MONO

appears in the AVR Upper Display Line , pressing and holding the

Tuning Up/Down Buttons K will cause the tuner to

scan up or down through the frequencies and stop when the button is released, even if that frequency does not provide an acceptable signal. In the

MANUAL/MONO mode, each tap

of the

Tuning Up/Down Buttons K will cause the tuner

to step through the frequencies in single-step increments. When the FM band is in use, pressing the button so that the

MANUAL/MONO mode is activated will enable you to tune

stations with weak signals by changing to monaural reception. See the

Main Room Operation/Tuner Operation section for

more information on tuner operation.

15.

Guide/Level Button: This button is used to start the process of

manually setting the AVR21EN’s speaker output levels. While a reference source is playing, press this button, and then press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F until the channel to adjust

appears. Press the

Set Button H to select that channel, and

then use the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F again to adjust the

level setting. Press the

Set Button H to set the level. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button F again until the next channel to

adjust appears. If no further adjustments are required, the Level Adjust mode will time-out automatically, as set in OSD duration. See the

AVR21EN Configuration/EzSet/EQ and

Main Room Operation/Output Level Trim Adjustment

sections for more information.

16.

Navigation Disc: This single disc-like button is used to navigate

the on-screen configuration menus, to scroll through option lists and to select various settings such as delay, speaker configurations, surround modes, digital inputs, etc. To use the button, simply press it up, down, left or right, in the direction indicated by the

⁄/¤

/‹/›icons printed on the disc.

17.

Exit/Cancel Button: When programming the remote, press

this button to cancel the current function and return to the previous remote function.

18.

Set Button: This button is used to enter settings into the

AVR21EN’s memory, or to confirm a selection while setting delay distances, speaker configuration and output level adjustments. It is used as the Enter or OK button for most other devices.

AVR21ENR1 Remote Features

25. Random Play Button: Press the top half of this button when a music player (CD, MP3 player or music server that has this command available) has been selected to have the player select and play tracks from all available tracks, in random order.

26.

Repeat Play Button: Press the lower half of this button when

a DVD/CD, MP3 player or music server has been selected to access the Repeat functions. You may repeat a chapter, track, title, disc, file or programmed playlist, depending upon the capabilities of the device being controlled.

27.

Program/PVR Replay Button: Press this button when a PVR

(personal video recorder) is in use, for replay of recorded materials. Refer to your PVR’s owner’s manual for more information.

28.

PVR List Button: When a PVR is in use, press this button to

list recorded materials. Refer to your PVR’s owner’s manual for more information.

29.

Audio Button: In DVD mode, pressing this button accesses

the available audio soundtracks on a DVD. In some cases, the disc may simply contain different languages. Other discs may switch the audio format: e.g., to linear PCM or Dolby Digital

5.1. Pressing this button may sometimes provide access to commentary soundtracks.

30.

Subtitle/TV/Video Button: In DVD mode, press this button

to select a subtitle language or to turn subtitling off. When used with a video source device that is used for obtaining television broadcasts, such as a cable box, satellite receiver, TiVo, PVR, DVR or VCR, this button allows you to select between the television signal or one of the device’s video inputs. See the device’s owner’s manual for more information on the use of this function.

31.

Remote Backlight Button: Press this button to activate the

remote’s backlight for ease of use in darkened rooms. The light will remain active for 7 seconds after this button has been pressed, and will remain lit for an additional 7 seconds after any other button on the remote has been pressed.

32.

Macro M1/M2/M3 Buttons: Press these buttons to store

or recall a Macro, a sequence of IR commands, that you may program into the remote. See the

Programming The

AVR21ENR1 Remote Control/Macro Programming

section

for more information on programming and using macros.

33.

Sleep/PIP Move Buttons: After pressing the AVR Button, the

Sleep function is activated to automatically place the AVR21EN in Standby mode after a period of time. Each press of the button changes the time until turn-off: 90 minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 minutes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes, 20 minutes, 10 minutes, SLEEP OFF, and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use, the front-panel displays will dim to half-brightness.

34.

Night Mode/PIP Channel Down Button: After pressing the

AVR button, this button activates the Night mode, preserving dialogue (center channel) intelligibility at low volume levels, when available in specially encoded Dolby

Digital sources.

35.

PVR Live Button: When a PVR is in use, this button switches

to play of the signal currently being received by the PVR. See the PVR’s owner’s manual for more information.

36.

Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up Button: After pressing the

AVR Button, press and hold this button to access the menu system for the remote control, enabling you to program product codes, use the EzSet/EQ speaker calibration system, record macros, rename functions and perform other functions, as described in the

AVR21EN Configuration/Programming The

AVR21ENR1 Remote Control

section.

37.

Top Menu/PIP On/Off/PIP Swap/AM/FM Button: When

one of the AVR21EN internal tuners has been selected, or when using an external tuner, press this button once to toggle the Tuner band. If an FM station is selected, the tuner will toggle to AM. Press the button again to return to FM. When AV/AUX is selected this button may be used to turn PIP On/Off for an appropriately capable cable/satellite receiver connected to the

AV/AUX Input 6.

38.

On-Screen Library/Favorite Button: In DVD mode, this button

accesses the On-Screen Library, which displays on screen a thumbnail image and description of each disc currently loaded in specific brands of DVD changers, including disc type and title, if available. Use the

⁄/¤

/‹/

›

Navigation Buttons F and the

Set Button H to conveniently select and play any loaded disc.

When used with cable television boxes or satellite receivers, pressing this button scrolls through your list of preprogrammed favorite channels.

39.

Play Transport Control Button: Press this button when used

with an external DVD player, VCR, tape deck, digital recorder, CD player or any other device with a transport mechanism to begin playback.

40.

Tune Up/Forward Search Button: This button has different

functions, depending on whether the tuner or another source is in use. Press this button when the tuner is in use to change the station to one with a higher frequency. When the tuner is in

MANUAL/MONO mode, each tap of this button will

increase the frequency by one increment. When the tuner receives a strong enough-signal for adequate reception,

MANUAL TUNED will appear in the AVR Lower Display

Line 

. When the tuner is in the AUTO/STEREO mode,

press and hold the button to cause the tuner to scan for the next higher station with acceptable signal strength and stop. The

Lower Display Line  will indicate AUTO TUNED.

When an FM Stereo station is tuned, the display will read

AUTO ST TUNED. When the tuner is in Manual/Mono

mode, you may press and hold this button to scan upward through the frequencies, and the tuner will stop immediately when you release this button, even if no acceptable signal is detected at that frequency. See

Main Room Operation/

Tuner Operation

for more information on using the tuner. When an optical player source, such as a DVD changer, is in use, press this button to search quickly forward through the current track or chapter. Depending on the type of disc used in the internal DVD/CD changer, each additional press will cycle through the available scan speeds.

button a second time to store your selection. To recall that station later, select the tuner as the source, then either use the

Preset Up/Down Buttons Ito scroll to the desired

preset station, or use the

Alphanumeric Keys  to directly

enter the preset station location. In DVD mode, this button may be used while a DVD-Video disc is playing to zoom the picture so that it is enlarged. There are four steps in the zoom function, each progressively larger. Continue pressing the button to cycle through the steps and return to the normal view. Depending on the disc, you may also be able to use the

⁄/¤

/‹/

›

Navigation Button F to view different areas

of the enlarged image.

46.

Alphanumeric Keys: Select numbers by pressing these keys.

When renaming functions or devices in the on-screen menu, these keys may also be used to select letters.

47.

Picture Button: Press this button repeatedly to scroll through

the different zoom options, to fit a 16:9 screen.

48.

Door Open Button: Press this button to open an electronic

door-lock controlled with one of the AVH21 Door Relays (requires Main Room keypad).

49.

Door Answer/Talk Button: Press this button to listen to a two-

way audio door monitor connected to the Main Room KP A/V jacks on the AVR21EN. Press and hold to “talk” to the door panel (Requires Main Room Keyapd).

50.

12V Trigger Button: Press this button to toggle the

12V

Trigger Out Jack  on the AVR21EN rear panel to

activate a voltage-controlled device such as a screen, a lift, lights, drapes or A/V components. This jack turns on and off with AVR power status. The Trigger button turns the control voltage from this jack On/Off while the AVR is on.

51.

Mute Button: Press this button to momentarily silence the

AVR21EN. Press it again, or use the

Volume Up/Down

Control J

, to restore audio.

52.

EzSet/EQ Microphone Sensor: The microphone sensor that

is used by the EzSet/EQ system is behind the three slots at the top of the remote control. When using EzSet/EQ to calibrate the AVR21EN, be certain that the slots are not covered. See the

AVR21EN Configuration/EzSet/EQ section for more

information on EzSet/EQ.

53.

IR Transmitter/Receiver: The infrared emitters and receivers

behind the plastic lens at the top of the remote communicate the remote codes to the AVE21EN and other programmed devices. Be certain that the lens is not covered when using the remote, and point the lens toward the AVR21EN for the best results. In learning mode, the remote receives IR codes to be learned through a receiver behind the lens. See the

Programming

The KP21ENR1 Remote Control/Learning Commands

sec-

tion for more information on learning remote codes.

NOTE: DO NOT remove the rubber plug that is supplied to cover

the jack on the upper right side of the remote. This jack is not active and is reserved for future use.

41.

Channel/Slow Play Up/Down Control: These controls use

the

‹/›

icons on the same disc as the Volume Up/Down

Controls J

. When a disc containing JPEG still images is being played using an external disc player, press the right side of this button to advance to the next image on the disc or the left side of this button to return to the previous image. When an external DVD player is in use and a DVD is playing, press the right side of this button once to switch to the DVD slow forward play mode. Each additional press of the right side of the button will cycle through the available slow-play speeds of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing the left side of the button switches to the DVD slow-reverse-play mode. Additional presses of the left side of the button cycles through the available slow-play speeds of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. No slow-play speeds are available for CDs or other disc types.

42.

Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip Button: This multipurpose

button has a different function, depending on the source in use. When used with the tuner, this button scrolls through the preprogrammed station presets. When used with optical sources, such as an external CD player, press this button once to skip to the beginning of the next track. The Page Up function is used with cable and satellite television to page quickly through on-screen menus.

43.

Last Channel/Distance Button: This button’s function differs,

depending on whether it is used in the System mode or with another source. In the System mode (pressing the AVR button), this button is used to enter the distance from each speaker group to the listening position, to avoid unnatural sound caused by the speakers being placed at varying distances from the listener, which could result in delay artifacts. When this button is pressed,

FRONT DELAY will appear in the AVR

Lower Display Line . Press the Set Button H. FRONT

10FT

will appear in the Lower Display Line . Use the ⁄/

Navigation Button F to select the desired distance, and press

the

Set Button H again to enter it. Use the

⁄/¤

Navigation

Button F

to scroll through the remaining speaker groups:

CENTER, SURR (side surround) or SBACK (back

surround – this setting will be available only if 7.1 Channel has been selected in system configuration). When used with most video sources, this button returns to the previously selected broadcast channel.

44.

Menu/Info Button: After pressing the AVR button, press this

button to display the AVR21EN Main Menu. This menu includes Clock Setup, Main Room Setup, Zone Setup (for Multiroom applications), Remote Control Setup, Reset Network Defaults (for Multiroom applications) and Diagnostics. In DVD mode, this button accesses the menu on the current disc, enabling you to select the main feature or extra features for playback or make other selections, depending on how the disc is programmed.

45.

Zoom/Memory Button: When used with the tuner, press this

button to enter the currently tuned radio station into a desired preset location using the

Alphanumeric Keys  to select the

preset location between the numbers 01 and 30. Press this

AVR21ENR1 Remote Features

AVR21ENR1 Remote Control

Programming the AVR21ENR1 Remote Control

To control devices such as your TV/projector, or a video game or camcorder using the AVR21ENR1 remote control, the AVR’s remote must be manually programmed using the remote’s built-in menu system. The process is similar in some ways to how the commonsource components (DVD, VR, cable/satellite) are programmed with the AVR OSD, but remote programming is done with the remote’s menu instead.

NOTE: There are only three devices that can be configured for

direct control using the AVR21ENR1 remote. They are TV, a video game or a camcorder. These devices will be controlled directly from the AVR21ENR1 with their original IR codes. All other system devices (sources) will be controlled from the control output of the AVR21 when accessed when using the AVR21ENR1.

TV Setup

To configure the AVR21ENR1 remote to control the Main Room TV:

1. Turn on the power to the TV. This is important, because in a later step you will need to see whether the TV turns off to determine whether the remote has been programmed for the proper remote codes.

2. Press and hold the

Rem Menu Button  for about 3 seconds

while the message shown in

Figure 83 appears in the remote’s

LCD

Information Display 2. Release the button when the red

light under the

Set Button H appears.

Figure 83.

3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message (Figure 84) will appear in the LCD, and the

Set Button H will remain illuminated in red.

Press the

Set Button H to begin the process of selecting a

device and locating the proper remote codes.

Figure 84.

4. GAME/CAM will appear in the LCD . Press the ⁄/

Navigation

Button F

to scroll to TV (Figure 85). Press the

Set Button H.

Figure 85.

PROGRAM CODE TV

MAIN MENU PROGRAM CODE

Manual Program

5. Press the Set Button H again to enter the Manual mode,

which means that you will select the brand name of the device from the list programmed into the remote’s memory.

Figure 86.

6. The next menu screen on the remote (Figure 87) will show the start of the list of available brands. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Buttons F until the brand name of the device

you are programming into the remote appears on the lower line of the display and then press the

Set Button H.

Figure 87.

NOTE: If the brand name for the product you wish to program

does not appear in the list, the codes may still be available, as some manufacturers share codes. If the desired brand is not listed, press the

Exit Button G to exit the programming process, and

skip to the instructions shown in

Automatic Code Entry for the

“Automatic” method of programming the remote. If desired, or if the codes for your brand are not part of the remote’s library at all, you may still use the remote to program most infrared-controlled products by “learning” the commands from the product’s original remote into the AVR remote. The instructions for Learning Commands are in the

Learning Commands section.

7. The next step is important, as it determines which codes will operate the source device or display. Point the AVR remote at the device being programmed and, following the instructions shown in the remote’s LCD

Information Display 2, press and

release the

Alphanumeric Keys  shown on the menu screen

(

Figure 88) one at a time, starting with the “1” button. After

you press the

“1” Button , the remote’s LCD screen will

briefly go blank as the code is being transmitted, but you will see the “transmit” icon in the upper right corner of the display to serve as confirmation that the remote control is sending out commands.

Figure 88.

8. After you press and release the number key, watch the device being programmed to see whether it turns off. As shown in the instructions that will appear on the next menu screen (

Figure

), if your device has turned off, press the Set Button H,

and then skip to Step 10. If the unit does not turn off, proceed to the next step.

PRESS A NUMBER CODE 1 OF 8

SELECT A BRAND RCA

PROGRAM CODE MANUAL

HOLD BUTTON FOR 3 SECONDS

2. Press and hold the Rem Menu Button  while the message

HOLD BUTTON FOR 3 SECONDS appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display 2. Release the button when the red

light under the

Set Button H appears.

3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message will appear in the LCD and the

Set Button H will remain illuminated in red. Press

the

Set Button H to begin the process of selecting a device

and locating the proper remote codes.

4. Press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button 9 to scroll through the list

of device categories and press the

Set Button H when the

device for which you wish to set the codes appears. For this example, we will select “TV” to enter the codes needed to operate your TV.

5. In the next menu screen on the remote, press the

⁄/¤

Navigation Button 9 so that the bottom line of the LCD

reads AUTO (

Figure 90) and then press the Set Button H

to enter the Automatic programming mode.

Figure 90.

6. As instructed on the next menu screen, press the

⁄

Navigation

Button F

to begin the automatic code search process. Your confirmation that the remote is sending out commands is the movement of a square block across the top line of the LCD screen while the bottom line reads PLEASE WAIT… You will also see the transmit icon in the upper right corner of the LCD’s top line to remind you that the remote is working, even though you may not see anything happening to the device being programmed.

7. It will take a few seconds for the remote to send out the first group of commands, after which you will see a new display in the LCD screen, as shown in

Figure 91. Following the

instructions, if the device being programmed has not turned off, press the

⁄

Navigation Button F again to send another

group of codes. If the device being programmed has turned off, skip to Step 9.

Figure 91.

8. By pressing the

⁄

Navigation Button F again, the remote will

send out a new set of commands. When it pauses, follow the instructions shown in Step 7. Depending on how many codes are stored for a specific device type, you may have to repeat this process as many as 15n times. Remember, if the device turns off, skip to Step 9. When all the codes for the device being programmed have been tried, the instruction shown in

Figure 92

will appear. This means that the codes for the product you are trying to program are not in the AVR remote library and you will have to “learn” them into the remote following the instructions shown in the next section. Press the

Rem Menu

Button 

as instructed to exit the programming process.

POWER OFF? Y - >1~0 N - >

PROGRAM CODE AUTO

Figure 89.

9. If the device being programmed into the AVR remote does not turn off after you have pressed the

“1” Button , repeat

Steps 7 and 8 by pressing the available numeric keys shown until the device turns off. If the device still does not turn off after all choices have been tried, or if there is only one number key shown as available to try, the code for this specific device is not in the AVR remote library under that brand name. If that is the case, press the

Exit Button G to exit the manual programming

mode. Remember that the codes may still be stored in the AVR remote’s library under another brand, and you can have the remote control search for them by following the instructions below for automatic programming. You may also manually “learn” the codes for most devices into the AVR remote by following the

Learning Commands instructions.

10. When the device being programmed does turn off after a

numeric key has been pressed, you must press the

Set Button

within 5 seconds to enter the setting into the remote’s

memory. After you press the

Set Button H, the top line of

the LCD will read SAVING… and then the word SAVED will flash four times in the center of the bottom line.

11. When the codes are saved, the remote will return to normal

operation, and whenever you press the

TV Button 5 that was

just programmed, the codes for the new device will be used.

NOTE: Some brands share a common remote control code for

“Power Off” for many models. For that reason, it is possible that even though the remote appears to be properly programmed, you may find that some buttons do not appear to issue the correct command. If this is the case, repeat the procedure outlined above, but if more than one numeric key selection is suggested in Step 7, try a different number to see whether the remote operates correctly. Although the AVR remote is preprogrammed with an extensive library of codes for many major brands, it is also possible that you may have attempted to program a product that is too new or too old, and thus not all of its commands will be in the code library. You may fill in the codes for any button that does not operate properly by using the learning technique shown throughout the following pages.

Automatic Code Entry

In addition to manual code selection using the brand name list, it is also possible to automatically search through all the codes that are stored in the AVR remote’s library to see whether a device will respond even if it is not listed among the brands that appear when you program the remote manually. To automatically search through the codes that are available for a specific device type (e.g., TV, Game, Camcorder), follow these steps:

1. Turn on the power to the device you wish to program into the AVR remote (TV, Game, Camcorder). This is important because in a later step you will need to see whether the device turns off to determine whether the remote has been programmed for the proper remote codes.

AVR21ENR1 Remote Control

POWER OFF? Y: SET N: NEXT #

100

AVR21ENR1 Remote Control

There are two options in LEARN CODE.

Learn Device: This option allows adding a single IR command

to the AVR21ENR1

Input Select Buttons 3, for functions such

as PLAY for a DVD/CD, VR, etc. It can also be used to output any command that may be desirable when selecting a particular source such as issuing a screen aspect ratio command, or other video display command.

Learn Button: This option allows adding a single IR command to

any button on the AVR21ENR1. This is useful when a particular code is not included in the onboard IR code library or for adding a special function for another device when a particular source has been selected.

NOTE: The Learn Button can only be used for learn-

ing IR commands for TV and Game/CAM. TV and Game/CAM are the only two settings that output a devices original IR codes directly. For all other devices (common sources), the AVR21ENR1 outputs proprietary commands that are interpreted by the AVR and converted to the original codes. To add IR commands to buttons for these other devices, use the OSD Menu Learning as described in the

Remote Control Setup/Learn Codes section.

To teach commands from one product’s remote into the AVR remote, follow the steps below:

The process requires that both the device’s original remote and the AVR remote be available. Before pressing any buttons on either remote, place them so that the IR transmitter on the remote belonging to the device to be programmed is facing the

Infrared

Lens 

on the AVR remote. The two remotes should be no more than an inch apart and there should not be any direct sunlight or other bright light source near the remotes.

Learn Device

1. Press and hold the Rem Menu Button  for about three

seconds while the message HOLD BUTTON FOR S SECONDS appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display 2. Release

the button when the red light under the

Set Button H appears.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message will appear in the LCD and

the

Set Button H will remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄

Navigation Button F once so that LEARN CODE appears on

the bottom line of the LCD screen, as shown in

Figure 94.

3. Press the Set Button H. The message in the LCD will change

to the LEARN CODE menu (

Figure 95). The bottom line will

default to the LEARN DEVICE option.

Figure 95.

LEARN CODE LEARN DEVICE

MAIN MENU LEARN CODE

Figure 92.

9. If the device being programmed does turn off after following the instructions in Step 7, you will need to verify the code set by pressing the

Alphanumeric Keys  in sequence, as instructed

Figure 93. Point the remote at the device being programmed,

and press the

“1” Button  to see whether the device

turns back on.

Figure 93.

10. After pressing and releasing the “1” Button , check to see

whether the device has turned back on. If it has, skip to Step 12. If it does not turn off, press the

“2” Button , or the next

button in the numeric sequence if you are repeating the procedure, as instructed by the LCD screen in

Figure 93.

11. When pressing the “1” button does not turn the device being

programmed back on, repeat the procedure by trying the remainder of the

Alphanumeric Keys  in sequence, each

time pressing and then releasing the button to see whether the new device turns back on. When it does, skip to the next step. However, if you try all 10 numeric keys and find that the unit will not turn on, you won’t be able to use this method to program the device. Press the

Rem Menu Button  to exit the

programming process. You’ll need to follow the Learning Commands instructions below to enter the codes for this device into the AVR remote.

12. When pressing one of the numeric keys in Step 10 or 11 causes

the device being programmed to turn back on, follow the instructions shown in

Figure 93 and press the Set Button H

within 5 seconds of the device turning on. After you press the

Set Button H, the top line of the LCD will read SAVING…

and then the word SAVED will flash four times in the center of the bottom line.

13. When the codes are saved, the remote will return to normal

operation, and whenever you press the TV or Game/Cam button that was just programmed, the codes for the new device will be used.

Learning Commands

On occasions when the AVR remote does not contain the codes for a particular product’s remote in its built in library, or when you wish to program a missing or special function into one button of a device, the AVR remote’s learning capability allows you to do that.

REACH END POINT PRESS REM KEY

POWER ON? Y - > SET N - > 1~0

Audioaccess W.H.E.N. AVR21EN Installation Instructions Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual